Debbie
Miller
Teaching Comprehension
in the Primary Grades
Reading
with
Meaning
Foreword by
Ellin Oliver Keene
Stenhouse Publishers
Portland, Maine
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Stenhouse Publishers
www.stenhouse.com
Copyright © 2002 by Debbie Miller
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, or any information
storage and retrieval system, without permission from the publisher.
Every effort has been made to contact copyright holders and students for permission to
reproduce borrowed material. We regret any oversights that may have occurred and will be
pleased to rectify them in subsequent reprints of the work.
Credits
Pages 83, 113, and 114: “Ducks on a Winter Night,” “Dressing Like a Snake,” and “Song
of the Dolphin” from Creatures of Earth, Sea, and Sky by Georgia Heard. Copyright ©
1992 by Georgia Heard. Published by Wordsong/Boyds Mills Press, Inc. Reprinted by per-
mission.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Miller, Debbie, 1948–
Reading with meaning : teaching comprehension in the primary grades / Debbie Miller.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 1-57110-307-4 (alk. paper)
1. Reading (Primary) 2. Reading comprehension. I. Title.
OB1525.7 .M55 2002
372.4—dc21 2002017594
Cover photographs by Debbie Miller and T. John Hughes (center photo)
Cover and interior design by Martha Drury
Manufactured in the United States of America on acid-free paper
06 05 04 03 02 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
To the Public Education and Business Coalition, an
organization whose commitment to education inspires us to
teach and learn with passion, rigor, and joy
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
This page intentionally left blank
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Foreword vii
In Appreciation xi
Prologue: It Doesnt Get Better Than This 1
1 Guiding Principles 5
Establishing a Framework Proficient Reader Research
Gradual Release of Responsibility
2 In September 15
Community: Creating a Culture and Climate for Thinking
Building Relationships Establishing Mutual Trust
3 ReadersWorkshop: Real Reading from the Start 25
Book Selection: In the Beginning Reading Aloud
Mini-Lessons Reading and Conferring Sharing
4 Settling In 39
Book Selection: Theirs Evaluation: Mine What About
Phonics and Word Identification?
5 Schema 53
Thinking Aloud: Showing Kids How The First Schema
Lesson
Text-to-Self Connections Making Meaningful
Connections
Thinking Through Text Together: An Anchor
Chart in the Making
Releasing Responsibility: Small-Group
v
Contents
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Work Text-to-Text Connections Schema Throughout
the Year
Evidence of Understanding and Independence
Schema at a Glance
6 Creating Mental Images 73
In the Beginning: Thinking Aloud Anchor Lessons
Evidence of Understanding and Independence Mental
Images at a Glance
7 Digging Deeper 93
Taking the Conversation Deeper Book Clubs for Primary
Kids?
Making Thinking Visible Taking the Learning
Deeper
Work Activity Time
8 Inferring 105
Anchor Lessons Evidence of Understanding and
Independence
Inferring at a Glance
9 Asking Questions 123
Anchor Lessons Evidence of Understanding and
Independence
Asking Questions at a Glance
10 Determining Importance in Nonfiction 141
Modeling Differences Between Fiction and Nonfiction
Noticing and Remembering When We Learn Something
New
Convention Notebooks Locating Specific
Information
Evidence of Understanding and
Independence
Determining Importance at a Glance
11 Synthesizing Information 157
Anchor Lessons Evidence of Understanding and
Independence
Synthesis at a Glance
Epilogue: In June 173
References 175
Index 181
Reading with Meaning
vi
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
T
here is a mystique about fine primary teachers. There is something
transcendent about them—almost superhuman. As a young inter-
mediate teacher, I regarded the fine primary teachers in my build-
ing with something like bewildered awe. There was magic in the air down
their hallway: those teachers were teaching kids to read, and although I had
studied reading theory, I still couldnt figure out how they could do it.
What were they doing? What was their secret?
When I approached the primary teachers I most admired and asked
them to describe how they taught kids to read, they were often unable to
articulate just how all the pieces came together. “I’m not sure,” they would
say. “I just know what to do. I follow the kids’ lead.”
When I first met Debbie Miller, my awe grew tenfold. Colleagues had
described the warmth of her classroom environment, the depth of her rap-
port with young children, the seamless way children managed their own
behavior in her classroom, her unconditional respect for each child. I
couldnt wait to meet another fantastic primary teacher from whom I could
learn. But I discovered a profound difference between Debbie and the other
fine primary teachers I had known. When I asked Debbie about her beliefs,
her approaches, her teaching strategies, she was able to define and describe
not just what she did with children, but why.
Debbie began one of our early conversations by sharing a research-
based belief statement she had written to guide her practice. She laid out
what was working as well as what was puzzling her about the children. She
didnt pretend to have the answers, but she knew that through study of chil-
vii
Foreword
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
dren and through professional study, she could explore and eventually artic-
ulate exactly why her children learned and responded in the way they did.
She was serious about her work in the classroom, but that indescribable
magic was there, too.
Debbie was everything my colleagues had described and more. There
was, however, one quality they hadnt told me about, and it is one I have
come to believe is essential to her success. Debbie was, and is to this day,
absolutely fascinated by children. As I came to know her, I realized that she
finds nothing so enthralling as kids, and her uncanny ability to describe her
successes in the classroom rests on her ardent observation of them.
In Reading with Meaning Debbie gives language to the mystique of the
superb first-grade literacy teacher. Specifically, she explains the cognitive
tools young children need in order to understand. With a written voice so
like the one I now know from countless conversations, she describes with
humor, respect, awe, curiosity, and joy what it really takes to help children
explore and understand their world and the texts written to describe that
world.
Debbie articulates like no other teacher I’ve known what matters most
in primary literacy teaching and learning. She makes the indescribable
world of young learners clear and real. She also has a novelists gift for
detail. Every reader of this book will laugh and cry and wince and gasp—
and, perhaps for the first time, really understand early literacy.
In writing this book, Debbie has undertaken a daunting task: to
define and describe the thinking processes a young child uses to understand
and what a primary teacher can do to teach those processes. The task is
daunting not only because it is difficult to articulate fine practice, but also
because all too many people in this country, teachers and nonteachers alike,
dont believe that young children are up to the task. Can a first grader, for
example, really synthesize as she reads? Come on. Can young children
determine importance? If they can, isnt it a fluke? Will they do it again
later, with another book? Surely they wont become independent in their
use of such strategies. Arent they really too young to think that abstractly?
Dont we really need to focus on comprehension instruction in the upper
grades instead?
In Reading with Meaning Debbie not only provides conclusive evi-
dence that young children can think strategically when reading, she causes
us to rethink every assumption we ever had about what young children can
do. She shows how children from widely varying backgrounds and with a
huge range of needs can become aware of their own thinking during read-
ing, learn to give language to that thinking, and use it to understand any
Reading with Meaning
viii
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
text more deeply. She shows us how children have an almost infinite ability
to understand and discuss even the most abstract ideas.
How does Debbie get her children to think and write and read with
the kind of fervor you will read about in this book? She believes they can,
she shows them how a proficient reader does it, and she provides the means
to make their thinking public. She is focused, purposeful, and clear. But
there is another piece, at least as important. As Debbie tells us, there is not
enough joy in our classrooms and schools. Given all the public urgency to
perform and all the seriousness with which we now approach early literacy
learning, there has to be magic, a bit of fun, a lot of joy.
In Reading with Meaning Debbie uses the natural seasons of a teaching
year to reveal the gradual process of immersing children in a rigorous yet
intimate learning environment followed by ways in which she introduces
and develops a range of comprehension strategies. As you work your way
through the book, you will live through the school year alongside Debbie
and her kids, listening in, glimpsing the exquisite development of thought
and understanding. By the end of the book, the end of the teaching year,
you will see how these first graders have come to understand concepts of
extraordinary complexity and how they can use the comprehension strate-
gies independently and with great confidence.
It isnt easy to explain great literacy instruction for young children. So
many fine teachers say, “I dont know, it just comes naturally.” Debbie
shows us that by defining and teaching the cognitive tools we all use to
comprehend text, we give children the tools they need to think and under-
stand with unprecedented depth. In this book, which I believe will become
a classic in literacy teaching and learning, Debbie Miller defines and
describes the instruction, and she tells us about the childrens successes. But
there is always magic in the mix, a little mystique, a bit of fun, a lot of joy.
Ellin Oliver Keene
January 2002
ix
Foreword
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
This page intentionally left blank
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
W
e were hot, sticky, and short on patience as we filed into the fac-
ulty lounge one afternoon late in May. Lingering smells of pep-
peroni pizza, microwaved popcorn, and ripe banana mingled
with a fresh bouquet of lilacs. We had been summoned by our principal for
yet another faculty meeting. “What could it be this time?” we wondered as
we sank into the odd assortment of chairs that lined the room.
“Guess what, everybody?” Doris announced cheerily. “We are all
going to become writers this summer!” Eyes roll. Pencils tap. Tony, the PE
teacher, shakes his head and groans. Unfazed, the principal continues.
“Raise your hands if youve heard of Shelley Harwayne.” Three hands shoot
up. “Only three?” she asks, looking shocked and holding up as many fin-
gers. “Shelley who?” I ask.
We learn that Shelley Harwayne will be in Denver for one week in
June, giving a literacy workshop sponsored by the Public Education and
Business Coalition (PEBC), a nonprofit group committed to providing
ongoing support and leadership for schools in the Denver area. We are
required to attend.
Thank goodness! (I say now). What happened that week is hard to
explain, but it left me forever changed. I already liked being a teacher, but
in just five short days I began to think about children, learning, and teach-
ing in new and exciting ways. I became passionate about my work and pas-
sionate about learning, too. It was as though I’d been starving, so insatiable
was my appetite to learn more about the kinds of teachers and schools
Shelley described.
xi
In
Appreciation
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
I started to hang out in bookstores. Don Graves, Lucy Calkins, Connie
Weaver, Nancie Atwell, Regie Routman, and Shelley herself had me holed up,
reading and writing that whole summer long. I wrote in the margins and dog-
eared the pages of books, and I wrote notes and reflections in my brand-new
notebook. These authors’ words became my words; their visions for teaching
and learning became my visions, too. I couldnt wait for school to start!
With the guidance and support of PEBC staff developers Steph
Harvey and Pat Hagerty, readers’ and writers’ workshops were up and run-
ning before the first snow fell. Gone were the “If I were a pencil” sentence
starters, basal readers, the bluebirds and the redbirds. And gone, too, were
the mile-high stacks of stapled work and activity sheets. I had taken, as
Shelley called it, “a leap of faith.”
Taking their place were literature and trade books, guided and indi-
vidualized reading, and opportunities for a wide range of responses.
Children were reading for longer periods of time than ever before, learning
to choose books to read that were just right for them, and flexibly using
strategies to figure out unknown words in the context of their reading.
Print covered the classroom walls, projects lined the window ledges and
spilled out into the hall. Life was good.
But then nagging questions started keeping me up at night. As I
planned for the week ahead, I’d wonder, “Am I really teaching kids every-
thing they need to know about reading?” I kept thinking that something
was missing; surely there must be something more for them, and me. I dis-
covered I wasnt alone with these thoughts. Some of my colleagues had sim-
ilar concerns.
As if on cue, enter Ellin Keene. As director of the PEBC’s Reading
Project, she and other staff developers heard us. Through their collabora-
tion and expertise, a new model of reading began to emerge. Basing their
work on reading comprehension research, they showed us that we need to
teach children strategies for comprehension as explicitly and with the same
care as we teach them about letters, sounds, and words.
I’d found my something more. After years of collaboration with col-
leagues and work in the classroom, I have visions of my own now. And
words, too! The support and love of many have given me the courage to
write them down.
To Ellin Keene: you already know I think youre brilliant! Thank you
for happily reading drafts over Saturday morning coffee, encouraging me
when I became discouraged, and being my friend through it all.
To my friend Steph Harvey, whose passion for learning exceeds that of
anyone I know: thank you most of all for teaching me to trust myself.
Reading with Meaning
xii
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Thank you, too, for introducing me to Philippa, and for advising me to
cut to the chase” when that’s what I needed to hear!
To Anne Goudvis, who gently scaffolded me into the writing world:
thank you for your friendship, sharing your wisdom, and helping me with
citations at the very last minute.
To Chryse Hutchins: thank you for your encouragement and your
insightful work with teachers everywhere.
To Kristin Venable, PEBC staff developer, former teammate, and fore-
most my friend: now we can go back to Saturday morning coffee at Sisters,
walks on the Highline Canal, and baby-sitting, too! Thanks for helping me
with computer problems, book organization, and rantings about quitting.
To Kathy Haller: never stop e-mailing me, and thanks for facilitating
all those labs. (Maybe we should start one in Vail?)
To Patrick Allen, Leslie Blauman, Mary Urtz Buerger, Bruce Morgan,
Carol Quimby, Cris Tovani, and Cheryl Zimmerman, gifted teachers and
staff developers who share their work and their classrooms with others on
what sometimes seems a daily basis: I’m honored to know and work with
you.
To Barb Volpe, Judy Hendricks, and to all those, past and present,
whose leadership and commitment have made the PEBC what it is today,
I’ll always be grateful.
To Philippa Stratton at Stenhouse: thank you for your patience and
knowing just when to call and exactly what to say to nudge me forward.
(And still it took me forever!) Also thanks to Brenda Power for her kind
words and encouragement, Martha Drury for her exquisite sense of design,
and Tom Seavey for his marketing expertise.
To Kathy Nutting and many others at Regis University: thank you for
a wonderful master’s program and for supporting my efforts to make
explicit my beliefs about children, learning, and teaching.
To my colleagues and friends at Slavens: you inspire me every day with
your wisdom, energy, and love of children, teaching, and learning.
To Barb Smith: thank you for hours of listening, sharing ideas, and
responding to my work with honesty. I love that my kids get to go to you
for second grade—you always know just where to take them next.
To Michelle DuMoulin: thank you for hosting labs with me and being
such a thoughtful teammate.
To Valerie Burke: thank you for your encouragement and for sharing
your stash of caramels!
To Sue Kempton: thank you for years of collaboration and friend-
ship.
xiii
In Appreciation
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
To Peggy Fuller: thank you for the many things you do for Slavens,
especially in the classroom. You lighten my load and let me do what I love
most.
To Joy Lowe: thank you, girlfriend, for bringing light and laughter to
our school, taking such good care of our kids when were gone, and teach-
ing us not to take ourselves so seriously.
To Charles Elbot, the principal of Slavens Elementary School: thank
you for supporting me in my efforts to write and teach at the same time,
and for giving all of us the freedom to teach with our heads and our hearts.
To the parents of Slavens students: thank you for your care and
encouragement, for trusting me to love and teach your children well, and
for your support of my writing.
To Darby Shaw: thank you for your interest in my work and for being
there the day I needed you most.
And kids: I love you! You already know that. But did you know you
are the reason I love coming to work? Did you know I learn just as much
from you as you do from me? And did you know that it was your smart
thinking that helped me write this book? You did? Good job!
To my very own children, Noah and Chad: I love you and am so
proud of the young men you have become. Being your mom is my greatest
reward.
To Don, my husband and best friend: I love you, babe! Thank you for
taking photographs, reading drafts, cooking, cleaning, and shopping so I
could write, and having faith in me even when I didnt. And most of all,
thank you for loving me, thirty years and counting!
And in memory of my mother, Joyce Everhart, whose own love of
teaching never left me wondering what I wanted to be when I grew up.
Reading with Meaning
xiv
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
1
It Doesnt
Get Better
Than This
N
ew crayons in bright red baskets sit at the childrens tables, flank-
ing caddies filled with sharpened pencils, markers, scissors, and
glue. The pencils stand tall, their erasers intact. All sixty-four
crayons point in the same direction. Markers fresh from familiar yellow and
green boxes have their lids capped tight. And the glue comes out of its dis-
penser with an easy twist of its orange cap and a gentle squeeze.
A basket of songbooks sits atop the small clusters of tables. Each holds
one or two copies of Five Little Ducks, Oh, a Hunting We Will Go, Little
Rabbit Foo Foo, Twenty-Four Robbers, Dr. Seuss’s ABC’s, My First Real Mother
Goose, Chika Chika Boom Boom, The Lady with the Alligator Purse, and
Chicken Soup with Rice. Assorted fairy tales, picture books, volumes of
poetry, and nonfiction text round out the selection.
In the meeting area, an old floor lamp and several small table lamps
glow softly, their shades decorated by children from years past. Plants that
have survived the summer are back home on the window ledge; paper flow-
erpots stick to the windowpanes, waiting for children to paint their bou-
quets. Empty picture frames await the smiles of this years girls and boys.
Low bookshelves filled with books sorted into labeled tubs define the
meeting area; ABC books sit alongside Arnold Lobel and Henry and
Mudge; space and underwater books nestle with the reptiles; and tubs
labeled “Predictable Books,” “Song Books,” “Fairy Tales,” and “Little Bear”
join “Insects,” “Poetry,” and “Biographies.” Picture books stand tall on
shelves of their own.
Prologue:
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
The Kissing Hand by Audrey Penn, this year’s choice for the first day of
school read-aloud, stands ready at the chalk ledge. The rocker and the
braided rug await us.
The writing table seems to say, “Get over here!” Paper of all sizes and
colors, lined and unlined, duplicator and construction, lies straight in
organizers that are just the right size. Six staplers and as many tape dis-
pensers line the back of the table, with refills close by. Small containers hold
paper clips, pushpins, sticky notes, hole punches, and staple removers.
Dictionaries and thesauruses stand at the ready on the ledge behind.
Unifix cubes, pattern blocks, calculators, and bright yellow Judy
Clocks; microscopes, magnifying glasses, slides, maps, globes, and atlases
fill the shelves in the math, science, and geography areas.
Wooden blocks and Legos left behind years ago by my own children
occupy another shelf. Buckets of plastic dinosaurs, insects, reptiles, and
other assorted animals are ready for play. Nearby, small tubs labeled
“Pastels,” “Beads,” “Buttons,” “Yarn,” “Needles and Thread,” “Fabric,”
“Stuffing,” “Clay,” and “Watercolors” are stocked and ready for work activ-
ity time.
Professional books stretch from one end of my desk to the other.
Nancie Atwell and Gay Su Pinnell, Donald Graves and Marilyn Adams
coexist peaceably. Ellin Keene and Susan Zimmermann, Lucy Calkins,
Shelley Harwayne, Georgia Heard, Richard Allington, Brenda Power,
Ralph Fletcher, Brian Cambourne, Joanne Hindley, Ralph Peterson,
Stephanie Harvey, Anne Goudvis, Harvey Daniels, Connie Weaver, and
others join them and are there when I need their counsel.
My plan book is open, all subjects and specials penciled in and
accounted for. Paper for individual portraits, first-day interviews, and forms
for the Reader Observation Survey and Developmental Reading
Assessment are ready to go.
Yellow, orange, purple, and green magnetic letters march across the
radiator, spelling “Welcome to First Grade”; the class list is posted in the
hall under my nameplate. Sweetheart, Speedy, and Floppsey are fed and
their cages pristine. As I take one last look before I leave for the day, I won-
der, “Does it get any better than this?”
Twenty-four hours later I find myself under those same clusters of
tables, picking up stray Unifix cubes, assorted crayons and marker lids, two
butterfly barrettes, an animal cracker, and one small white sock with lace.
On the tables, the crayons have abandoned the caddies; pencils are mysteri-
ously dented and have mixed themselves in with the markers, and the glue
looks as if it’s had more than just a gentle squeeze.
Reading with Meaning
2
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
My desk is piled high. Registration forms, emergency cards, testing
dates, and memos from the office mingle with money and checks for the
PTA, today’s lunch, and school sweatshirts. Notes from parents request Girl
Scout information, an overview of this years curriculum, and the date and
time of the Halloween parade. Two more parents have written to let me
know their children are gifted.
I plop into my chair and take another look. This time I notice the tiny
bouquet of dandelions in the red plastic glass, the happy purple, orange,
yellow, and green chains that now hang from our doors, and the “I luv U
Mlr” written on the dry-erase board.
Magnetic letters that once marched across the radiator now dance,
spelling Mom, Dad, LOVE, Zac, cat, and IrNsTPq.
Yesterdays empty flowerpots hold painted bouquets of what I think
might be daisies, roses, geraniums, and tulips. Childrens portraits with
their too-high-on-the-forehead eyes, crinkled paper hair, glued-on earrings,
and bright red lips smile back at me.
I read over their interviews. Hannah wants to learn to write her little
letters; Cole wonders why the octopus squirts ink. If they could do any-
thing in the world they wanted, Eric would be a fireman, Will would go to
the moon, and Jake would live in the theater district in New York City.
When I asked Grace, “What’s one more thing I should know about you?”
she answered, “You should know I believe in fairies.” And Brecks answer? “I
really want you to teach me.” Now I know for sure. It really doesnt get bet-
ter than this.
3
Prologue: It Doesnt Get Better Than This
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
This page intentionally left blank
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Charting childrens
thinking makes it visible
and permanent and
traces our work together.
5
Guiding
Principles
1
Cory uses the same
format for Tuts Mummy
Lost and Found by Judy
Donnelly.
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
W
hen I think about the principles that guide my teaching of read-
ing comprehension, I realize that they are the same principles
that guide my work throughout the day. Gradually releasing
responsibility to children as they gain expertise, teaching a few strategies of
great consequence in depth over time, and giving children the gifts of time,
choice, response, community, and structure guide my work and allow me to
make thoughtful decisions based on principles I believe in.
It was Brian Cambourne who encouraged me to make explicit my
beliefs about teaching and learning. He supported me and my colleagues at
Regis University as we explored the beliefs, theories, and practices of others,
considered their implications for teaching in general, tried out new prac-
tices in our classrooms, and finally synthesized and made explicit our per-
sonal beliefs about teaching and learning.
When we know the theory behind our work, when our practices
match what we believe, and when we clearly articulate what we do and why
we do it, people listen. At back-to-school night, when I get questions like
Are you phonics or whole language?” or “My child is reading at the sixth-
grade level. How will you challenge him?” or “Do you believe in ‘invented
spelling’?” my stomach no longer churns. I know what to say. No longer are
my answers vague, my demeanor tentative, my attitude defensive. No
longer do I say things because it’s what someone wants to hear. I’m clear.
I’m confident. I’m calm. Parents appreciate and respect a teacher who
“knows her stuff,” even when it doesnt quite agree with theirs.
Or maybe the district is thinking of adopting a new spelling program.
I can look at it and know fairly quickly if its something that I could work
with. When an administrator asks us about leveling all the books in our
school library or the new assistant principal asks us to dye our hair green if
children read a certain number of books, I really dont have to ponder. I
know just what to say.
What if you are mandated to do something that you know in your
heart is not best for kids? Look at it carefully. Maybe there is a piece of it
that will work. As for the rest? Chances are, both your method and the new
one have the same goals; maybe you just believe in going after it a little dif-
ferently. Think about how you believe reading needs to be taught, and be
ready to thoughtfully explain how and why. Then make an appointment
with your principal and do it. Most administrators listen and support
teachers when we speak with conviction, know the research behind our
beliefs, and present our point of view in respectful, rational ways.
There are many effective ways to teach children and live our lives. No
one has a patent on the truth. Find yours. Read. Reflect. Think about what
Reading with Meaning
6
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
you already know about good teaching and how it fits with new learning.
Read some more. Think about the implications for your classroom.
Collaborate with colleagues. Try new things and spend time defining your
beliefs and aligning your practices. Once youve found what’s true for you,
stand up for what you know is right. Live it every day and be confident and
clear about why you believe as you do. People will listen!
Establishing a Framework
Think about yourself as a reader. You probably choose what you want to
read for a variety of purposes, have opportunities to read for long periods of
time, respond mostly through reflection, conversation, and collaboration,
and sometimes share your thinking and insights with others. In a readers
workshop, children have daily opportunities to learn to do the same.
Structured around a mini-lesson (15–20 minutes), a large block of
time to read, respond, and confer (45–50 minutes), and a time to share
(15–20 minutes), the readers’ workshop format provides a framework for
both strategy instruction and the gradual release of responsibility.
The mini-lesson provides teachers with opportunities to think aloud
and show how strategies are used to make sense of text. The large block of
time for reading, responding, and conferring allows children to practice
strategies in small groups, in pairs, and independently, and gives teachers
time to teach, learn, and find out how the children are applying what theyve
been taught. The share time gives children a chance to share their work as
well as an opportunity for reflection, conversation, learning, and assessment.
Sometimes visitors ask me, “You mean you have a readers’ workshop
every day? Dont the kids get bored? Dont you?” Yes, no, and no. The truth
is, I cant imagine having a workshop only two or three days a week, or leav-
ing out a component here and there, depending on my mood. Such ques-
tions always draw my eye (and subsequently the visitors’) to the quote by
Lucy Calkins that hangs above my desk:
It is significant to realize that the most creative environments in
our society are not the ever-changing ones. The artist’s studio,
the researchers laboratory, the scholar’s library are each deliber-
ately kept simple so as to support the complexities of the work-
in-progress. They are deliberately kept predictable so the unpre-
dictable can happen. (1983, p. 32)
7
Chapter 1: Guiding Principles
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
To get started, find ninety uninterrupted minutes in your day and put
your readers’ workshop there. No time like that in the morning? Look at
your afternoon. I’d choose a big block of uninterrupted time in the after-
noon over a chopped-up morning any day. The workshop wont run ninety
minutes until after the first four or five weeks, but teach well and you’ll be
amazed how quickly your children will get there!
Proficient Reader Research
When Ellin Keene, then director of programs at the PEBC, handed me a
copy of the proficient reader research synthesized by Pearson, Dole, Duffy,
and Roehler (1992), my eyes glazed over. Who were these guys, anyway?
And what did they know about teaching real kids in real classrooms? Yes, I
knew something was missing in my readers’ workshop. I’d been saying I
wanted rigor. And yes, I trusted Ellin. But come on! This stuff seemed way
too ivory tower to me.
The article was published in the early 1990s; researchers had spent
much of the previous ten years investigating what proficient readers do to
comprehend text, what less successful readers fail to do, and how to best
move novices toward expertise. From this work, Pearson et al. identified
comprehension strategies that successful readers of all ages use routinely to
construct meaning when they read and suggested that teachers need to
teach these strategies explicitly and for surprisingly long periods of time,
using well-written literature and nonfiction.
The research showed that active, thoughtful, proficient readers con-
struct meaning by using the following strategies:
Activating relevant, prior knowledge (schema) before, during, and
after reading text (Anderson and Pearson 1984).
Creating visual and other sensory images from text during and after
reading (Pressley 1976).
Drawing inferences from text to form conclusions, make critical
judgments, and create unique interpretations (Hansen 1981).
Asking questions of themselves, the authors, and the texts they read
(Raphael 1984).
Determining the most important ideas and themes in a text
(Palinscar and Brown 1984).
Synthesizing what they read (Brown, Day, and Jones 1983).
Reading with Meaning
8
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Sounds simple enough, right? But how exactly does one go about
teaching a few strategies of great consequence, in depth, over a long period
of time? Especially one who, after wading through the research, is seriously
wondering if she is a proficient reader herself?
I was always a fast reader, and therefore, I figured, a good one. In
school, I remember being among the bluebirds, flying high through story
after story, zipping through the questions at the end, and turning in pages
of neatly written seatwork with the pictures colored in just so.
But this stuff was different. What did they mean, think about your
thinking? I’m reading too fast to think. Interact with the text? Forget it; I
just want to find out what’s going to happen next. Draw inferences?
Determine importance? Synthesize? I’m not sure what those terms mean, let
alone know if I do them!
Still, I was intrigued. I wanted to learn more. And because of Ellin,
who recognized that the research had merit long before many of us did,
small groups of us began meeting once a week to try to make sense of it all.
Ellin understood that first we needed to learn about ourselves as readers.
She challenged us to be metacognitive—to think about our own thinking
as we read. We’d read books and short pieces, keep track of our thinking by
jotting notes in the margins, and then talk about the pieces and what we
were thinking as we read.
When we began to pay attention to what was going on inside our
heads as we read, we were amazed at what we learned about ourselves as
readers. We were making connections, asking questions, drawing infer-
ences, and synthesizing information. We began to create working defini-
tions for each of these strategies, realizing early on that the dictionary
definition was not going to cut it. (We fancied ourselves way beyond
Webster!) While friends chided us to “get a life,” we knew Ellin was right.
Only when we took the time to really get to know ourselves as readers were
we able to seriously consider the implications of the research for the chil-
dren in our classrooms.
Were we proficient readers all along? I’m not sure. Did all this height-
ened awareness simply bring to the forefront what was already going on
inside our heads when we read? Maybe. Regardless, I’m a different reader
now. I’ve learned to slow down and enjoy the ride; getting there no longer
consumes me. Ten years later, I’m still paying attention!
I find myself asking questions, inferring, making connections, and
smiling when I silently name what I’m doing. Its not a loud, in-your-face
consciousness like it was in the beginning, but a soft, quiet, more natural
one, holding conversations with myself when I read.
9
Chapter 1: Guiding Principles
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
The proficient reader research has kept me in teaching. Not only was it
the “something missing” I’d been searching for, but it systematically raised my
expectations for children as well as for learning and teaching. And the best
part? Teaching isnt as predictable as it once was. Every day I know children
are going to surprise me with their thinking, teach me to see and understand
things in new ways, motivate me to think deeply about my teaching, and help
me make thoughtful decisions about where to go next and why.
Gradual Release of Responsibility
Chances are that if you think back to a time when you learned how to do
something new, the gradual release of responsibility model (Pearson and
Gallagher 1983) comes into play. Maybe you learned how to snowboard,
canoe, play golf, or drive a car. If you watched somebody do it first, prac-
ticed under that persons watchful eye, listened to his or her feedback, and
then one fine day went off and did it by yourself, adding your own special
twist to it in the process, you know what this model is all about.
Pearson and Gallagher use a model of explicit reading instruction
using these four stages that guide children toward independence:
1. Teacher modeling and explanation of a strategy.
2. Guided practice, where teachers gradually give students more respon-
sibility for task completion.
3. Independent practice accompanied by feedback.
4. Application of the strategy in real reading situations.
The table “Components of the Workshop” shows how the readers
workshop provides the framework for teaching comprehension strategies
within the context of the gradual release of responsibility instructional
model.
Teacher modeling, or showing kids how, includes explaining the strat-
egy, thinking aloud about the mental processes used to construct meaning,
and demonstrating when and why it is most effective. Thinking aloud
about what’s going on inside our heads as we read allows us to make the
invisible visible and the implicit explicit.
Guided practice, or what I like to call “having at it” (it is also some-
times called scaffolding) consists of gradually giving children more responsi-
bility for using each strategy in a variety of authentic situations. Here, chil-
Reading with Meaning
10
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
dren are invited to practice a strategy during whole-class discussions, asked
to apply it in collaboration with their peers in pairs and small groups, and
supported by honest feedback that honors both the child and the task.
During independent practice, or the “letting go” stage, children begin
to apply the strategy in their own reading, ideally using real texts in real
reading situations. Teacher feedback through conferences is essential; teach-
ers need to let children know when theyve used a strategy correctly,
encourage them to share their thinking with the teacher and their peers,
challenge them to think out loud about how using the strategy helped them
as a reader, and correct misconceptions when they occur.
Application of the strategy, or the “Now I get it!” stage, is evident when
children apply their learning independently to different types of text or in
other curricular areas. By this stage, children are more flexible in their
thinking: they begin to make connections between this strategy and others;
they can articulate how using a strategy helps construct meaning; and they
can use strategies flexibly and adaptively when they read.
So what does all this mean for kids? How can we help them find their
own soft and quiet voices? From my reading of the research, late-night and
after-school conversations with colleagues, and years of personal experience
11
Chapter 1: Guiding Principles
Components of the Workshop
Phases of Gradual
Release
Modeling reading
behavior
Thinking aloud
(showing how)
Guided practice
(having at it)
Independent practice
(letting go)
Application on their
own (now I get it!)
Time to Teach
15–20 Minutes
Read-aloud, Mini-lesson
Whole Group
Time to Practice
45–50 Minutes
Reading, Conferring
Small Group, Pairs,
Independent
Time to Share
15–20 Minutes
Reflection, Sharing
Whole Group, Small Group,
Pairs
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
as a reader and a teacher, I’ve come to believe that I’m most successful at
teaching children to be active, thoughtful, proficient readers and thinkers
when I
have a deep understanding of the strategy being taught and am aware
of when and how it helps me as a reader.
think aloud using high-quality literature and well-written nonfiction.
gradually release responsibility for using each strategy.
confer with children regularly and offer honest feedback that moves
each child forward based on my knowledge of how proficient readers
use the strategy being taught.
use language that is scholarly and precise, creating a common language
for discussing books and ideas both in and out of the classroom.
teach each strategy separately and in depth, but show how one strategy
can build on another.
teach the reader, not the reading.
make thinking public by creating anchor charts that children can
refer to, add to, or change over the course of the year.
demonstrate how strategies can be applied to other curricular areas.
create an environment where reading is valued and seen as a tool for
gaining new knowledge and rethinking current knowledge.
How do you begin to plan for a six- to eight-week in-depth compre-
hension study using the gradual release of responsibility model? First, think
big picture. What’s your working definition of the strategy you’ll be teach-
ing? When do you use it? How does it help you? What do you think is key
for kids to know? Next, consider how you will define this strategy. What do
you want to say, and how will you say it? Remember, this is a working defi-
nition, meant to get you and your students started. It doesnt have to be all-
encompassing or perfect—the children will help you with that!
Think, too, about what you believe is key to the strategy you’ll be
teaching. Break it down. What is it that you believe is most important for
kids to learn? This book can help you with that, but dont leave all the
thinking to me! You’ll come up with different understandings that are
equally important.
Once you know what you want to teach, think about how you will
teach it. What books will you use to model your use of the strategy and the
points you want to make? How will you gradually release responsibility to
your students? How will you know if they are getting it? For this kind of
big-picture, long-term planning, I use a form (shown on the next page) to
Reading with Meaning
12
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
help me think about where I want my students to go and how I hope to get
them there.
I know its difficult just to think about planning a six- to eight-week
course of study—in fact, I used to think it was counterproductive. After all,
how could I possibly know where wed be eight weeks from now? But this
isnt about the day-to-day planning—that still needs to be done. Rather,
this “big picture” planning is about creating a well-thought-out, overall plan
that guides my work and gives direction to my day-to-day planning.
Theres nothing worse than walking into school each morning having
to figure out what to teach, scramble for a book, come up with a plan.
When we get caught in that trap, our teaching becomes disconnected, just
a series of lessons rather than a coherent plan for learning.
13
Chapter 1: Guiding Principles
Strategy Instruction Using the Gradual Release Model
Strategy
Time frame
High Teacher Shared Child
Low
Responsibility
High Teacher Shared Child
Low
Responsibility
✗✗
High Teacher Shared Child
Low
Responsibility
Modeling and thinking aloud
Shared experiences and guided practice
Independent practice
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Do I ever deviate from the big picture? Absolutely. I never know when
a child or a colleague will cause me to think about things in new ways, lead
me in new directions, and redefine my old thinking. As David Pearson said,
“Good planning, like good instruction, is as intentional as it is adaptable
(Pearson, personal interview, 1995).
Reading with Meaning
14
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
15
In
September
2
Frankies response to the
question “What do we
know about books?”
Sharing a snack is
the perfect time for
practicing good manners
and the civility of
conversation.
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
I
t’s late afternoon. The children have gone for the day, and save for a
lone cricket chirping from his bug box in a faraway corner, the room is
quiet. It’s the second week of school, and despite vows that this year its
going to be different, that this year there really will be balance in my life,
I’m already feeling overwhelmed and out of sync. And instead of being
smart and heading out for the gym, or even staying to get ready for
Wednesdays Back to School Night, score the district’s newest assessment,
or check my voice mail for the messages I know await me, I find myself
watching the sunlight as it streams in through the windows.
My eye catches a stack of letters peeking out from under a pile of
books. Realizing theyre the ones I’d asked parents to write, and mortified
I’d forgotten them in the rush of the first week, I sink (or is it slink?) into
the once-white overstuffed chair in the corner and begin to read.
I’d invited parents to take a few moments to write me about their chil-
dren, asking them to think about things that might be important for me to
know as well as their hopes and expectations for the coming year. As I read,
I learn that this years children are animal lovers, Irish step dancers, Kenny
Loggins enthusiasts, pianists, creative artists, Lego-maniacs, gymnasts, soc-
cer players, geniuses, and budding geniuses. They are dubbed silly, smart,
sweet, caring, serious, mature, young, sensitive, gregarious, shy, confident,
playful, and imaginative.
Matthews parents write that from the day he was born, he had a
sparkle in his eye, and now they do, too. They say that “more than any-
thing, Matt would love to read.” Caitlins family tells me they waited ten
years for her and that she is “the light of our lives.” And Dannys parents
write, “we moved into the neighborhood because our dearest wish was for
you to be his first-grade teacher.” (Yikes!)
As I read the letters from the parents, I’m struck by the love between
the lines, the hopes and dreams that live in their words, and the faith and
trust they have in me. No one wrote that they wanted their child to score
high on the Iowa Test of Basic Skills, or attain Level 20 by the end of first
grade, or even meet the highly publicized state standards. Its not that they
dont want those things for their children, but the things they chose to write
me about—the things they considered most important for me to know—
were not about test scores, reading levels, or state standards.
I remind myself that in the incessant push for higher test scores, and
in the face of endless editorials about the demise of public schools and mis-
guided politicians and their plans for reform, I must not let myself—or my
budding geniuses—get caught up in some kind of frenzied, frantic pace
that knows no end. I remind myself not to let go of what I know is best for
Reading with Meaning
16
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
kids. For me, September is all about building relationships, establishing
trust, creating working literate environments, and getting to know children
as readers and learners—and remembering that our classrooms still need to
be joyful places where we take the time to appreciate Matthews sparkling
eye, Isabellas shy poetic spirit, and Kendals boundless energy.
Community: Creating a Culture and
Climate for Thinking
If you had asked me about the importance of creating a sense of commu-
nity in my classroom ten years ago, I’d have said it was everything. I’d have
talked about the interviews and surveys we do at the beginning of the year,
the self-portraits taped above the chalkboard, the photographs everywhere
of children playing and working together. I’d have told you about Talent
Show Tuesdays, about writing and signing “Our Promise to Each Other,”
and about the childrens work that hangs not only on the boards and doors
but also from the wires that crisscross our room. I’d have told you about the
cozy spaces where children work in small groups, pairs, and independently,
and about rituals for birthdays, losing a tooth, and saying good-bye. And
finally, I’d have mentioned that each day begins with our singing “Oh,
What a Beautiful Morning” with Joanie Bartels, and ends with an a cap-
pella version of “Happy Trails to You” written by cowgirl Dale Evans.
And if you asked me about the importance of creating community
today? I’d still say it’s everything. But now I know that once the promises
are written and signed, the room beautifully and thoughtfully arranged,
and the photographs taken, developed, and sitting prettily in a frame, our
work has just begun. Real classroom communities are more than just a
look. Real communities flourish when we bring together the voices, hearts,
and souls of the people who inhabit them.
When our vision of community expands to create a culture and cli-
mate for thinking (Perkins 1993)—when rigor, inquiry, and intimacy
become key components of our definition—it’s essential that we work first
to build genuine relationships, establish mutual trust, and create working
literate environments. If we look to the months ahead and envision chil-
dren constructing meaning by spontaneously engaging in thoughtful con-
versation about books and ideas, asking questions that matter to them and
exploring their solutions, and responding independently to a variety of text
in meaningful ways, we must be deliberate in September.
17
Chapter 2: In September
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Building Relationships
I begin by paying attention to the little things. It’s noticing Paiges cool new
haircut, Grant’s oversized Avalanche jersey, Kendal’s sparkly blue nail pol-
ish, and Codys washable tattoos. Its asking about Palmer’s soccer game,
Jane’s dance recital, Elizabeths visiting grandpa, and Hannahs brand-new
baby brother.
It’s giving Ailey a heart rock to add to her collection, copying a poem
about cats and giving it to Gina because I know she loves them, and even
putting a Band-Aid on Graces tiny paper cut. Showing children we care
about them and love being their teacher is an important first message. And
at the same time, I’m modeling for children how to show someone you care
about them; I’m modeling how you go about creating lasting friendships.
Teaching children how to listen and respond to each other in respect-
ful, thoughtful ways also helps foster new relationships and caring commu-
nities. I used to have long conversations with children about this, telling
them how important it was to listen carefully to each other and to really
think about what their classmates have to say. I’d talk about responding
respectfully, to look at the person youre speaking to, call them by name,
and on and on. But the very next day a child might groan at a song another
had chosen, wildly wave a hand when someone else was talking, or flip
through the pages of a book while another child was sharing. And I’d go
into the whole respect routine again. During these conversations, the chil-
dren were just as eloquent. They sounded just like me! But their behavior
didnt change. And I’d wonder, “What’s going on here? Why dont they get
it?” And even sometimes, “What’s wrong with these kids, anyway?”
Eventually I realized, of course, that nothing was wrong with “these
kids.” They didnt get it because I hadnt shown them how. I’d told them to
be respectful, thoughtful, and kind, but I hadnt shown them what that
looks and sounds like.
The best opportunities to show kids how occur in the moment. When
Frankie says to Colleen, “Colleen, could you please speak up? I cant hear
what you have to say,” I cant let that pass without making sure everyone
heard. I cant let that pass without pointing out how smart it is to want to
hear what someone has to say. I say, “You guys, did you just hear Frankie?
Frankie, could you say that again?” She does, and I ask, “So boys and girls,
why was that such a smart thing for Frankie to do?” They respond, and
then I use their words and mine to bring our thoughts together.
And when Max tells Jack that his idea is “a little bit dumb,” I cant let
that pass either. I say, “Max, I’m sure you didnt mean to be rude to Jack,
Reading with Meaning
18
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
but when you said his idea was a ‘little bit dumb,’ that’s what you were
being. It’s okay to disagree with someone, but there are nicer, more polite
ways to do it. You might say something like, ‘Jack, I dont understand what
you mean’ or ‘Jack, why do you think that?’ Try it again, Max.” He does,
beautifully this time, and I dont miss the opportunity to let everyone know
how much weve learned from Max today.
Or Sean is trying to find a place in the circle, and he starts nudging
himself into a spot four inches wide. I say, “Sean, could you think of a bet-
ter way to get yourself into the circle?” Seans stumped. “Well, how about
this? The next time you need to be in the circle and there isnt room, how
about asking someone to scoot back so you can fit in? Lets try it right now.
Just say, ‘Sunny, could you please scoot back so I can fit in the circle?’” He
does. Next, I turn my attention to Sunny. “Okay, Sunny, Sean has asked
you nicely to scoot back. What could you say back to him?” She says, “Sure,
Sean, I’ll scoot back for you.” With smiles all around, she does.
Is the first time the charm? No. And probably not the third time
either. But remain diligent. Remain calm. Dont give up the good fight!
Once the flagrant violations are in check, watch closely for the rolling of
eyes, the private conversations, the exasperated sighs. Dont let those go by
either.
You can use these first lessons—we can call them “anchor lessons”—to
refer back to. For example, when Sarah snaps at Troy, I say, “Oops, Sarah,
what’s another way you could tell Troy what youre thinking? Think back to
how Max handled something like this.” We’ll assist her if she needs it, but a
gentle reminder is usually enough.
Here are a few more teachable moments.
To the children with the wildly waving hand when someone is talking:
“You know what, guys? I know youre not meaning to be rude, but when
your hand is up and someone else is talking, I’m thinking youre probably
focusing on what youre going to say rather than listening to the person
who is speaking. What do you think? Since we can learn so much from each
other, remember to keep your hands down and really listen and think about
what your friends are saying. When they’re finished, you can share what
youre thinking.”
To the children who abruptly get up in the middle of a story or discussion:
“Oh my goodness, youre going to leave us now? Think of the learning
youll miss! Can you wait until the story [or discussion] is over? Thanks.”
To the children who always have something to say, no matter the topic or
the day, and the ones who hardly have anything to say, ever: “Today I want you
to think about yourselves as listeners and speakers. If youre someone whos
19
Chapter 2: In September
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
great at talking a lot, I want you to be a listener today. See what you can
learn. If youre someone who is a great listener, I want you to do some talk-
ing today. We want to know what you are thinking, too. Raise your hand if
you think you do a lot of listening. Raise your hand if you think you do a
lot of talking. Wow! You really know yourselves. That’s so smart. Let’s try
it.”
To those who have already heard every book in your library and cant wait
to let you know the minute you hold it up: That’s so great youve heard this
book before. And you know what? Since we know how much more we can
learn and understand when we reread, I want you to pay special attention
when you hear the story today. Think about what you notice this time that
you didnt notice before. Think about what puzzled you the first time, and
what you think about that this time. Will you let us know?”
Doesnt all this take a lot of time? You bet. But it sets the tone for
learning and thoughtful conversation; it paves the way for the work that lies
ahead. Once children realize youre not going to relent, once they realize
that this is not just a “sometime thing,” and once they understand what you
want them to do and why it’s important, it becomes habit. It becomes part
of the language of the classroom.
Establishing Mutual Trust
Like building relationships, establishing trust takes time. And it must begin
with me, the teacher. Every time I value a child’s idea by acting on it, think
out loud to make sense of a question or response because I really want to
understand, or ask children what they think and then listen carefully, I let
them know I respect their thinking and trust that they have something
smart to say.
I dont mean in a superficial “theyre only seven” kind of way; I mean
trusting children enough to give them the time and the tools to think for
themselves, to pose and solve problems, and to make informed decisions
about their learning. Respecting their ideas, opinions, and decisions doesnt
mean carte blanche acceptance, but it does mean giving their voices sincere
consideration. Trust needs to be mutual. If were asking children to
thoughtfully consider the thinking of others, we must expect no less from
ourselves.
It was Lauren who made me a believer. It was early in her first-grade
year, and she’d been happily reading books like Whose Mouse Are You? by
Reading with Meaning
20
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Robert Kraus and Cookie’s Week by Cindy Ward. But the day I read aloud
Mary Hoffmans Amazing Grace, things changed. She had to have that
book. I gave her my usual line: “You know, Lauren, I’m thinking this book
is too challenging for you right now. How about waiting awhile, then giv-
ing it a try? You can keep it safe in your cubby until then. Let’s find Where
Are You Going, Little Mouse? I think that would be perfect for you.” But
shed have none of the mouse. It was Amazing Grace she wanted.
In the end, she won me over. But once I’d said yes, I couldnt just give
her the book and say, “You go, girl.” Once I’d relented, I needed to do
everything I could to help make her decision—now ours—a good one. I
had to figure how best to support her and maximize her chances for success.
This wasnt about power or proving a point; this was about helping a little
girl learn to trust herself and make good decisions about her learning.
We made a plan together: I’d help her learn a page a day at school,
shed reread what she’d learned already, and shed take the book home every
night to practice. Five weeks later, the kids and I were calling her Amazing
Lauren! And she was amazing. Not only was she able to read Amazing
Grace, but she was off and running, reading books like Oliver Button Is a
Sissy by Tomie dePaola, Wild Wild Wolves by Joyce Milton, The Paper Bag
Princess by Robert Munsch, and Honey, I Love by Eloise Greenfield.
What if I’d said no? Would she have learned to read Oliver Button,
Honey, I Love, and the others? Probably. But I want to do more than teach
kids how to read. I want to teach them how to go after something if they
really want it, I want to teach them the rewards of hard work and determi-
nation, and I want to teach them that if theyre sincere, I’ll do everything I
can to support them.
If we expect big things from children, we must expect big things from
ourselves, too. For years I’d been told what to do in my classroom and how
to do it. Glossy teachers guides with smiling children on the cover even
told me what to say. I didnt always read the words in italics exactly as writ-
ten (I considered myself a rebel even then), but I’d get the gist of the lesson
from the guides. Beyond running off worksheets and making cute activities
for centers, I never had to think much about reading at all. Come to think
of it, the kids didnt either.
So when PEBC staff developer Steph Harvey blazed into my room
with a whole new way of thinking about children, learning, and teaching,
she made my head hurt. Every other week shed come, lugging a tote bag so
full of books they left a trail behind her like Hansel’s crumbs of bread. Shed
do a fabulous demonstration lesson, wed debrief over lunch, and then off
shed go. “Wait!” I’d plead. “Cant you leave me with a bit more of a plan
21
Chapter 2: In September
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
until you come back?” Just like my teacher’s manual, I wanted her to tell me
where to go next; I thought she knew more about my kids than I did.
But Steph was wise. She wouldnt hand over any prescribed set of
mini-lessons. Instead, shed say, “Come on, Deb. Think about what you
already know about good teaching. You know your kids. Where do you
think they need to go next?” Her best advice? “Trust yourself.”
Only when I began to assume responsibility for the teaching, learning,
and thinking in my classroom did I understand that I really did know my
kids, what they needed, and where they needed to go next. Only then did I
begin to believe I was smart enough to figure this stuff out for myself. I’d
had support from Steph, yes, but shed made it clear the decisions were
mine to make. Shed trusted me before I’d known to trust myself.
And because she did, I wanted to live up to her expectations; I wanted
to be as good as she thought I was.
Actually, I wanted to be even better. I began to read more professional
books and articles, to join study groups, and to observe other teachers. I
worked long hours defining my beliefs and aligning my classroom practices;
I came to know the supporting research. I learned to believe in myself.
So what are the implications for the children in our classrooms?
Theyre huge. When we show children we expect them to share thought-
fully in the responsibility for their learning, when we let them know we
believe theyre smart, and when we support them just enough so that they’ll
be successful, were doing for them what Steph did for me. We’re trusting
them first so that they can learn to trust themselves.
In my role as staff developer, teachers and others often observe our
readers’ and writers’ workshops. Invariably, someone will come up and
whisper, “You know, they really are talking about the book back in the cor-
ner over there.” (They think I’m going to be surprised.) Or they’ll wonder,
“So how do you know what your kids are doing if you dont meet with each
one every day?” and “You mean they can just go up to the library all by
themselves?” I tell them what I’ve already told you; later we talk about get-
ting started.
Start small. Think about the things in your classroom that you do
automatically, without even thinking why. Ask yourself, “What am I doing
now that I could trust kids to do?” and “In what ways could I trust children
where I havent before?” Think about things like . . .
Do they really need to go to the bathroom and get a drink all at the
same time, or could children take care of those things on an individual
basis? Do I need to count and monitor the number of pretzels or animal
crackers they take for snack, or can I trust them to take two or three? Am I
Reading with Meaning
22
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
the only one capable of refilling the staplers and tape dispensers, and replac-
ing sticky notes, worn-out markers, and paper towels? Do I really need
elaborate and time-consuming check-out systems for books, CDs, markers,
videotapes, calculators, or whatever else children may want or need at
home? I say no. Not when were clear about what we expect and why. Not
when we trust kids enough to show them how.
23
Chapter 2: In September
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
This page intentionally left blank
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
25
Readers
Workshop:
Real Reading
from the Start
3
Torin and Jack work
together to sound out
words.
Real literature by real
authors engages young
readers.
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
T
he voice of Joanie Bartels singing “Oh, What a Beautiful Morning” is
the signal for children to finish selecting their books and gather in the
meeting area. By the last “I’ve got a beautiful feeling, everything’s
going my way,” everyones singing along with Joanie. Readers’ workshop in
first grade is in full swing. Weve been at it for almost three weeks now, and
children have learned how to select their books for the day, how to gather for
a story and mini-lesson, how to practice reading behaviors in authentic situa-
tions using real books, how to use workshop procedures, and how to share
with their classmates what theyve learned about themselves as readers.
“Hold the phone,” you might be thinking. “How could they learn all
that in just three weeks?” or “How can you have a readers’ workshop when
they cant even read?” Hang on. The fact is, most children havent learned to
decode or comprehend. Not yet. And still, they see themselves and their
classmates as readers. They clearly look the part, and right now, thats pre-
cisely the point.
Readers’ workshop in September is less about teaching children how
to read and more about modeling and teaching children what it is that good
readers do, setting the tone for the workshop and establishing its expecta-
tions and procedures, and engaging and motivating children to want to
learn to read. Once these are in place, we can move forward quickly with-
out the distraction of management, procedural, and behavioral issues.
Rigorous environments do not have to be rigid or restrictive. I know
we have mandates, time lines, and important tests to give. And still I say
slow down! Learning to read should be a joyful experience. Give children
the luxury of listening to well-written stories with interesting plots, singing
songs and playing with their words, and exploring a wide variety of fiction,
nonfiction, poetry, and rhymes. Let them know when they say or do some-
thing smart; give them credit and ask them to share. Help children access
what they already know and figure out how to help them make connections
to something new. Be genuine. Laugh. Love. Be patient. Youre creating a
community of readers and thinkers; youre building relationships and estab-
lishing trust. Come October, you’ll be glad you did.
Book Selection: In the Beginning
Remember the red baskets of books sitting atop childrens tables I mentioned
earlier? For the first two or three weeks of school, children select their books
each day from these. I include a variety of books in the baskets, mostly the
Reading with Meaning
26
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
songbooks weve been learning, but also familiar fairy tales, ABC books, a
few picture books, poetry, and well-illustrated nonfiction. I add new song-
books to the baskets as we learn them, favorite read-alouds, and sometimes
enlarged, photocopied, laminated copies of poems, songs, snippets of text,
or rhymes children especially love. Each basket (ours are the 12-by-18-inch
plastic ones) holds around twenty-five books and serves four to six children.
In September, the books and materials I’ve chosen are most likely not
at the childrens instructional level; whether a child can or cannot read them
doesnt matter right now. I’ve chosen them because the familiar songs and
story lines, the short text, and the colorful illustrations are perfect for chil-
drens working with books, practicing reading behaviors, becoming engaged
and motivated, and building community.
When children arrive each morning, they select three or four books
from the basket at their table, place them at their seats, chat a bit with their
friends, and begin reading. In a couple of weeks, children may choose to sit
almost anywhere in the room, but in the beginning, when were establishing
procedures, reading behaviors, and the tone of the workshop, they sit at the
tables. I use this time to say hello, have brief conversations with the children
about what’s going on in their lives, and offer reassuring words to the few par-
ents who still have a hard time saying good-bye. I also do some noticing (love
those bright red sneakers!) and check to see if anyone needs help with book
selection. After most of the children have arrived, I put on the music and chil-
dren gather in the meeting area for the days read-aloud and mini-lesson.
The tone for the beginning of the school day has a relaxed, social, “I’m
glad youre here” sort of feel. It’s very similar to the way I begin my own
day; I cant imagine walking into the building, striding down the long hall
to my room, unlocking my door, and immediately creating a chart or
reviewing the days lessons. First I need to feel connected in some way to the
people I work with, whether its asking Sue about her new baby girl, talking
with Barb about the class we teach together, or stopping in to check out
Michelles tadpoles and chatting about why hers are again twice the size of
mine. I need to take the time to light a candle, put on a little Eric Clapton
or Keb Mo, and ease myself into the day.
Reading Aloud
My first read-aloud is almost always a songbook. I introduce a new song-
book each day, I have two or three favorites ready to go, then I ask for
27
Chapter 3: Readers’ Workshop
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
requests. Most days we end up singing six or seven—children love the pre-
dictable text, rhythm, and rhyme. This continues well into October, and
while we might “graduate” from Five Little Ducks by Raffi and Oh, a
Hunting We Will Go by John Langstaff, we begin the day with music all year
long. Often I’ll type up the words to favorite songs from CDs, tapes, books,
and my Girl Scout days. The children follow along, and once they know the
words, laminated copies go into the baskets and plain copies are sent home.
In addition to their repetition, rhythm, and rhyme, my reasons for
choosing songbooks and singing songs are many:
Theyre fun!
Children are instantly engaged and motivated to learn to read the
words. I have multiple copies, and children cant wait to get their
hands on them.
The words and tunes are easy to learn; children read along right away
and feel part of the “reading club” almost immediately.
They build community. Where else would “Little Rabbit Foo Foo” be
declared “our song”?
Children love to take them home to share with parents, brothers, and
sisters. I send a note with the copies, telling parents the purpose of
the songbooks, ways to support their early reader, and reassurances
that yes, right now, pointing to words and memorizing are good
things! Parents appreciate being connected to the classroom so early
in the year, and sometimes respond by sending in words to songs
they learned as kids.
Repeated readings increase phonemic awareness and build sight word
vocabularies.
Once weve warmed up with songbooks, I read aloud one or two other
types of books, depending on their length and the childrens mood.
Sometimes I’ll read one of the books out of the baskets at the childrens
tables; I try to vary genre, author, format, and style and think about books
this particular group of kids can easily connect with or what might pique
their interest.
Reading aloud comes into play throughout the day. After lunch
and/or at the end of the day, I often read aloud from a chapter book.
Perennial favorites include The Trumpet of the Swan by E. B. White, Mr.
Popper’s Penguins by Richard and Florence Atwater, Pippi Longstocking by
Astrid Lindgren, Poppy and Poppy and Rye by Avi, and the My Father the
Dragon series by Ruth Stiles Gannet.
Reading with Meaning
28
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Reading aloud is one of the most important things I do. I cant believe
I used to feel so guilty about it that I’d shut the classroom door! Now I
know reading aloud motivates kids to want to learn to read, extends their
oral language, and gives them opportunities to connect new information to
what they already know. And reading aloud offers teachers opportunities to
share a variety of genres.
model fluency and reading behaviors.
construct meaning through think-alouds and offer children the time
and tools to do the same.
build community.
share with kids our love of reading and learning.
Mini-Lessons
At the beginning of the school year mini-lessons focus primarily on model-
ing and identifying reading behaviors and teaching and learning the expec-
tations and procedures of the workshop. Reading behaviors are the observ-
able things that readers do—the deliberate actions we take that connect us
to our lives as readers. Think of them as the habits we keep, like keeping a
running list of books we want to read, recommending books to friends, par-
ticipating in book groups, or even bookmarking our places with a paper
clip or rubber band. If we want children to develop habits that readers keep,
we must heighten their awareness by explicitly modeling and pointing out
what it is that readers do and giving them time to practice these behaviors
in authentic situations using real books. Focusing first on what readers do
prepares children for learning how they do it.
A first lesson on reading behaviors could begin this way: “Boys and
girls, from talking with you and reading letters from your parents, I’ve
learned that this is a class that wants to learn all about reading. Is that true?
It is? Well, guess what—I love to teach kids all about reading, so this is
going to be perfect! I’m thinking that you guys are like a lot of other kids I
know: I’m thinking that you know a lot of things about reading already. Let
me show you what I mean. Think about somebody you know who loves to
read. Can you get a picture of that person in your head? Good. Now, this
person you know who loves to read, what do you see him or her doing?
What do you know about this person as a reader?”
Children respond:
29
Chapter 3: Readers’ Workshop
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
“They have book clubs; my moms in one with Oprah!”
“They go to the library all the time and check out a ton of books.”
“They read lots of different stuff, like my dad. He reads newspapers
and books and magazines and papers from his work.”
“They read a lot.”
“Listen to you!” I tell them. “You do know a lot about what readers do!
I’ll record your words on sentence strips like this one, and then I’ll tape
them on the door there. That way we wont forget. Over the next couple of
days, let’s do some investigating—let’s watch carefully for people who are
readers and notice what else they do. Let’s see how many more things we
can add to our list.”
At the end of the week, the door is covered. Children and I observed
readers
talking about books and ideas.”
recommending books to each other.”
asking questions about the stories.”
reading with friends.”
trading books with each other.”
pointing to the words as they read.”
rereading books.”
“buying books.”
sounding out words.”
“laughing, crying, smiling, frowning.”
reading out loud.”
using a bookmark.”
finishing one book and starting another one.”
writing on Post-its and sticking them in the book.”
“looking at the pictures and reading the little words under them.”
reading really fast.”
reading slowly.”
“looking up a word in the dictionary.”
Children also started paying attention to where readers read, and they
insisted on recording this information, too (on another door). So, where do
readers read?
In bed
Under a tree
Reading with Meaning
30
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
On the porch
Up in a tree house
Under the covers
In school
At a soccer game
In a bubble bath
On an airplane
In the bookstore
At the checkout stand
In the car
Waiting in line
On the couch, and
In a big red chair!
(I think we have the makings of a poem here!)
From the first lesson on, I model and children begin practicing the
things that readers do, and we talk about the reasons why. For example, one
day we might begin a series of lessons on what readers do when they finish
reading a book. From discussion and our class-generated list, we learn that
they might reread the book, choose another one, talk about their book with
a friend, or read it with a buddy. We also speculate (and soon find out first-
hand) why we might do each of these things. For example, we might choose
to reread to better understand the story, get better at reading the words, get
ready for a book group, or maybe just because we love the book.
Because the list of reading behaviors is long, I choose the most impor-
tant behaviors—that is, the ones I think are most important for beginning
readers to practice early on. I put my energy, and theirs, into those.
What’s my purpose here? Why spend time modeling and practicing
reading behaviors? I’ve learned that doing these things
sets the tone for creating a working literate environment.
lets children know that they share in the responsibility for their
learning.
builds community—together we investigate, learn, and practice what
it is that readers do.
offers kids opportunities to make informed choices about their learning.
fosters independence.
actively engages readers early on and builds confidence.
sends the message, “You are smart, I know you can do this, I’ll show
you how.”
31
Chapter 3: Readers’ Workshop
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Mini-lessons this early in the year also establish workshop (and class-
room) procedures. I begin by asking myself just two questions: What are
the things that consistently interfere with teaching and learning? and What
procedures can be put in place to lessen or eliminate their impact?
What drives me crazy? It’s the grinding of the pencil sharpener when
children are working, the plaintive voices asking to get a drink or go to the
bathroom, children lining up or calling out to ask how to read or spell a
word. It’s being interrupted during a conference with a child or a conversa-
tion with an adult, transition times that take too long, children telling me,
“I’m done,” or asking, “What do I do now?” It’s kids’ abandoning books
without making the effort to have a go, my asking for their attention over
and over, and announcements over the intercom about candy sales,
Brownie meetings, and the band.
What keeps me sane? If the problem can be solved in the classroom, I
quickly initiate conversations and/or mini-lessons about what it is thats
interfering with teaching and learning, why it’s a problem, and how we
might solve it.
A procedural mini-lesson might begin this way: “You know, yesterday
I was conferring with Cody, and all of a sudden we heard the loud, grinding
sound of the pencil sharpener. Do you know the sound I mean?” Their
nods and big eyes tell me they do. “It seemed to go on forever, and Cody
and I couldnt focus on our work. We couldnt even remember what we
were talking and thinking about. Right, Cody? And I’m wondering, did the
pencil sharpener interfere with anyone elses learning?” Tales of woe follow.
“I have an idea that might help us—let me know what you think
about this. See these two cans? One is labeled ‘I’m sharp!’; the other is
labeled ‘Please sharpen me.’” If your pencil lead breaks or it gets dull from
so much writing, put it in this can labeled ‘Please sharpen me.’ Then, just
take a sharpened pencil from this one, the ‘I’m sharp!’ can, and keep work-
ing. What do you think?” Everyone thinks it’s a very smart idea.
Another day during reading, two children behind me keep repeating
my name, another is softly tapping my shoulder, and one more is doing
something with my hair. I turn and face them. “Hey, you guys, I’d love to
talk with you, but I’m in the middle of a conference. Please find a place to
read quietly, and right before we share we’ll talk about other ways for you to
let me know you need me when I’m working with someone else. Be thinking
about what might work.” Then, during the “How’s it going?” part of the
share, I say, “Girls and boys, before we begin sharing, theres something we
need to talk and think about. I know there are times during reading when
you really need to talk to me and I’m busy conferring with someone else. I
Reading with Meaning
32
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
do want to help you, but I cant just stop in the middle of a conference.
What do you think we could do to make this better? Take a couple of min-
utes to talk with those next to you and see what you can come up with.”
Jake and Olivia propose that “if theres something that only Mrs.
Miller can help you with, you could write her a little note and stick it on
the dry erase board. Then keep on reading until she comes to you; dont
just, well, you know, sit there.” Olivia reminds everyone to “sign your
name.” After the initial flurry of messages, we agree: it’s a hit.
Why not just post a list of rules on the first day of school and be done?
I remember those days, but that was when the room was mine, not ours;
that was when I was the only teacher, and they were the only learners; and
that was when I asked all the questions, and had all the answers, too.
Reading and Conferring
Before sending children off to read, I’m explicit about what I want them to
do, how they can go about doing it, and why its important. I want them to
begin this part of the workshop with a clear sense of purpose; I want them
to be thinking, “I get it. Now let me have at it!” So how do kids “have at it”
when most are not yet reading? Reading books and working with books are
two different things. Although learning to read and comprehend books is
our goal, working with books helps get us there and introduces children to
the real world of reading.
Let’s say the mini-lesson had been on using sticky notes to mark the
places in your book where you learned something about yourself as a reader.
Before sending the children off, I’d say, “In your reading today, if you find
yourself thinking, ‘Hmmm. I just learned something about myself as a
reader today—I figured out the words space and suit by looking at the pic-
ture,’ remember to mark that page with a sticky note, just the way I showed
you. That way, you can keep track of your learning and thinking, and if you
share, you’ll know the exact page to open your book to. Got it? Good.
Think, too, about why marking your learning and thinking is an important
thing for readers to do. Let’s talk later about what you discovered during the
share. Happy reading!”
I know that not all children will keep track of their learning and think-
ing by marking the text with sticky notes today, but some will. The enthu-
siasm and excitement generated by even one or two children as they model
and share how it helped them as readers and learners are contagious.
33
Chapter 3: Readers’ Workshop
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Okay. Let’s say you agree with the importance of reading aloud, and
youre comfortable with mini-lessons. But sending kids off to read and work
with books so early in the year? What would that look like with twenty-seven
first graders? Well . . . It’s Jamie and Grace singing “Five Little Ducks” over in
a corner while Jane’s carefully pointing to the words I’ve copied onto chart
paper and Torin and Palmer are looking at a book about snakes, gleefully
poring over the bulge that has got to be an eaten mouse. It’s Brodie and
Frankie, each signing out a copy of The Lady with the Alligator Purse by
Nadine Bernard Westcott and Chicken Soup with Rice by Maurice Sendak—
they have a play date after school and already theyre making plans to make
Rice Krispies Treats and read in Brodies tree house. It’s Sheldon, Cain, and
Conner wandering a bit—how many drinks have they had? Coles in a corner
following the tiny black-and-white drawings in Hand Rhymes by Marc Tolon
Brown, trying to manipulate his fingers and read “Two Little Monkeys” at the
same time; Grant’s working at my desk with Touch the Poem by Arnold Adoff,
making a list of every word he knows—already he’s up to seven! Nickies just
read It Looked Like Spilt Milk by Charles Green Shaw three times and Twenty-
Four Robbers by Audrey Wood twice, and now shes searching the basket for a
copy of Little Rabbit Foo Foo by Michael Rosen. Its Julianna and Jake, gig-
gling and marking their pages with sticky notes every time they figure out a
new word, their books overflowing with the bright yellow flags of their learn-
ing. Troys snuggling in that once-white chair leafing through Dr. Seuss’s
ABC’s, singing the alphabet song to no one in particular. And at one table,
Jamie’s reading all about Henry and his big dog, Mudge; it looks like Colins
coloring circles on sticky notes and putting them in his book, Gemstones by
Ann Squire; and Colleen has spread out three different versions of The Three
Little Pigs, comparing illustrations and story lines.
What am I doing in the midst of all this? I’m conferring with children,
taking notes, and learning as much as I can about them as readers. I’m
intrigued by Colin: whats with all the colored circles on his slips, and what
has this very social little boy so engaged?
“Hey,” I say, sliding up a chair. “Colin, it looks like youre really into
that book. Can you talk with me about it?”
“Well, I think its a really good learning book for me.”
“What do you mean, a really good learning book?”
“Well, I always like to learn new stuff, and I like rocks and this book
gets me to know more stuff about ’em.”
“Like . . .”
“Well, you see here on this page—” he finds the slip on which hes
drawn a red circle, “see, on this page, it’s all about rubies. Red, red rubies.”
“That’s so smart. How did you know this page was all about rubies?”
Reading with Meaning
34
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
“See?” He points to each letter. “R-U-B-Y, that says ruby. And heres a
picture of a ruby. It’s red. And here it says red, see, R-E-D.”
“Ruby, that’s kind of a tricky word. How did you figure it out?”
“It’s not tricky! It’s my grandmas name!”
“That’s funny! Do you see any other words on this page that you
know?”
Colin squints. “Let’s see. Um, there’s the, and see, and oh! There’s ruby
again!” More squinting. “That’s all for today.”
“Good reading, Colin. Thank you. You know what else? I’m so inter-
ested in all your sticky notes with the colored circles. How does that work?”
Deep breath. “Okay. So say I want to learn about rubies, I just put my
finger right in front of the sticky note and open it up. See? And heres where
the blue rocks are, and the purple ones, and the green ones. Get it?”
“I do get it! That’s so smart to mark your place that way. I’m thinking
that would be a smart thing to share with everyone. Would you do that?
Share with them what you shared with me?”
“Sure!”
“Thank you for talking with me, Colin. I learned a lot from you
today! See? I wrote it all down here. Look at all you know!”
“What’s it say?”
“It says that you like nonfiction books—they’re the kind that give you
information, like Gemstones. And that youre confident—that means you
believe in yourself and try new things. Here it says you can work with other
kids, like you did yesterday, and by yourself, too, like today. And here? See these
words? These are the words you read to me. Want to read them again? . . . Good
job! And these words next to the star? I wrote a note to myself to try to find
some other books about precious stones or colored rocks for you; some that
have fewer words on a page. All these things show me how smart you are, and
help me know how I can teach you best. Did I get everything?”
“Did you write that my grandmas name is Ruby?”
“Oops! I forgot that. I’ll put that right here, next to the words you
know. Before I go, do you need my help with anything?”
“I want to know the names of all the rocks, like the purple ones, the
green ones, all the different colors. Will you teach ’em to me?”
“I’d love to teach them to you! Why dont you pick two or three right
now? We could make a book that has all the names of the gems you know
during work activity time if youd like. We could keep adding to it every
time you learn a new one. What do you think?”
Huge grin. “I want to know this purple one.”
“That’s an amethyst.” I write the word under the purple circle on his
sticky note.
35
Chapter 3: Readers’ Workshop
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
And this green one.”
“That’s an emerald.” I write emerald.
“Do we really get to make a book during work activity?”
“We do.”
“Will you write it down in your notebook? With a star?”
“You bet.”
“This is the best day of my life! Hey, Colleen, I get to make a book all
about colored rocks in work activity!”
Colleen raises an eye. “Well, I’ll still be studying The Three Little Pigs.
“So, Colin,” I say, “what will you do next?”
“I’m just gonna stick with this book, and next I want to read Way
Down South, this one right here.”
“Good plan. Thanks, Colin. Bye.”
Adios.”
I slide my chair over to Colleen. “Hi, Colleen, whats going on over
here? . . .”
Sharing
I signal that share time is about to begin by singing, “Everybody listen!”
Children sing back, “Right now!” I ask them to think about what theyve
learned about themselves as readers today and to think a minute about how
they might best share that with the group. I slip a CD into the player, and
before the final chorus of Rosenshontzs song “One Earth” children have
arranged themselves in a large circle and are singing along. Some have
books in front of them, indicating theyd like to share.
This part of the workshop has evolved over the years into more than a
time for children to share their learning. It’s that, for sure, but some days it’s
also a forum for exchanging ideas and discussing issues, making connec-
tions from our reading lives to the world, and constructing meaning for
ourselves and each other, one idea at a time.
In September, much of our time is spent setting the tone and estab-
lishing procedures. While I’m interested in what children have to say about
what theyve learned about themselves as readers, I’m not focusing so much
on the content of what they have to say right now. I’m not worried when
their thinking seems muddled or off the mark—thats natural. Right now I
want them to practice oral language and the civility of conversation; I want
them to know how it feels to think about their thinking; I want them to
become familiar with the routines and procedures of the share.
Reading with Meaning
36
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Because I know that some of the most significant learning will come
from this part of the workshop, its important that I make clear what the
sharing will look and sound like, and why. Once again, I think about what
I want for kids in March, April, and May, and set about getting them there.
I know I want children to be reflective and thoughtful not only about
books and ideas, but also about how they view the world and their place in
it. That’s why we spend the first few minutes of the share reflecting on the
day so far. I ask them to think about questions like “How did reading go for
you today? What’s working well for you?” and “What’s not working so
well?” When a chorus of children answers the first question with, “Good!”
(they always do), I know I’ve got work to do! I’ll say, “Think back. What
was good? What about today was good for you? Can you think out loud
about that?” Then I give them time to formulate their answers. Or maybe
I’ve asked, “Is there anything that didnt go well today?” and a child
answers, “It was too noisy for me.” In that case, I respond with, “What was
too noisy? How did it get in the way of your learning? Think back and
think out loud about what we could do to make it better tomorrow.”
Children dont always know that they know something. My modeling,
guiding, and nudging them to think back, think out loud, and take a reflec-
tive, thoughtful stance often show them that they do. Later in the year,
when I ask them, “So how do you know?” or “What makes you think that?”
or “Tell me more about your thinking,” theyve had practice being reflective
and thoughtful. The time we spend thinking out loud about the day sets
the tone for the rest of the share. Children come to understand that I expect
a respectful, thoughtful, time-to-listen-and-learn-from-each-other frame of
mind.
I model and talk with children about their responsibilities for sharing,
listening, and learning. Every day I remind them, “If youd like to share,
remember you need to be prepared: bring your book, think about how you
can best share your learning, and speak loudly enough so that everyone can
hear.” I tell the rest of the children, “If youre the ones who are learning,
youll need to be looking at the person speaking, listening carefully, and
thinking about what he or she has to say. Is everybody ready?”
I take a look around the circle and notice those who want to share. I
usually begin with children I’ve conferred with that day, particularly those
who I know have something pertinent to share (most likely this means
something connected to the mini-lesson). I invite children by saying some-
thing like, “Colin, would you like to share?” Colin answers, “Yes, thank
you. The title of my book is Gemstones, and when I was reading today I did
this really cool thing. See all these Post-its? If I want to study about rubies,
I find the red circle—thats the color rubies are—and I just open it up to
37
Chapter 3: Readers’ Workshop
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
this page. If I want to study the purple rock, its called a—um, what is it,
Mrs. Miller?”
“It’s called an amethyst.”
“Yeah, amethyst. If I want to study about them, I go to the purple circle
and open up to this page. See? And were going to make a book at work activ-
ity and I’m going to learn to read all the names of every one in the book.”
“Colin,” I ask, “can you talk a little about how youre using the Post-its
to help you as a reader?”
“Um . . . they help me find my place so I dont have to take forever try-
ing to find stuff?”
“Youve got it! Thank you, Colin. Boys and girls, what did we learn
from Colin today?” Hands fly.
Jamie, Grace, and Jane each have a copy of Five Little Ducks in front of
them. I invite them to share, and they begin singing.
“Oops!” I say. “What do you need to say back? Let’s start again. Jamie,
Grace, and Jane, would you like to share?”
“Yes, thank you,” they answer together.
“Perfect. Now, tell us about what youre going to do, and what you
learned about yourselves as readers.”
Grace begins. “Well, we learned all of the words in Five Little Ducks,
and we want to sing for everyone. You can clap, but only at the end.” They
sing, and we clap at the end. After a brief lesson on clapping (how long is
too long?) I ask them, “So, how did you get so good at reading the words?
What did you learn about yourselves as readers?”
Jamie nails it. “We kept practicing and practicing. And we learned
that sometimes it’s fun to learn a book together.”
Grant shares the ten words he already knows from his book today. He
thinks writing them down on sticky notes is a good idea, but hes not sure
how it will help him as a reader. I’m not sure, either, but Olivia knows.
“Now hes learning to write the words he can read.” “So what do you think,
Grant? What do you think about what Olivia said?” Grant smiles and gives
a little shrug.
People who visit often say to me, “That’s so cute how they say, ‘Yes,
thank you.’ How did you get them to do that?” Maybe it is cute, but that’s
not why I ask the children to respond that way. Its about tone, it’s about
respect, and its part of the language we use as we live and learn together for
six-and-a-half hours every day. Later in the year, visitors ask, “How do you
get your kids to talk and share their thinking like that? My kids could never
do that.” How did I get them to do that? Its really pretty simple. I taught
them.
Reading with Meaning
38
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
39
Settling In
4
Asking children to
think about why theyre
recommending a book to
a friend encourages
thoughtful
recommendations.
Camille chooses to read
(and fingerplay) Marc
Tolon Browns Hand
Rhymes during readers
workshop.
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
T
he zucchini is piling up in the teachers’ lounge. Halloween cos-
tumes and giant bags of bite-sized candy bars have replaced wading
pools and charcoal briquettes at the local KMart. And I’m just
about ready to admit that yes, this years group has potential! Readers
workshop has taken on a new look, too. By late September, children under-
stand its procedures and expectations. They know all about what readers
do; now theyre ready to learn how.
Book Selection: Theirs
Because my goal is for children to apply strategies for decoding and con-
structing meaning independently, it now becomes essential that most of
their books be at their instructional level—“just right.” It’s difficult to apply
strategies when you know every word and understand everything; it’s
equally difficult when you know hardly any words and understand very
little. Pulling just any book off the shelf or out of a basket will not do.
Even so, giving children choice is important. I could easily hand each
of them a book or two that I think would be just right, but why? Teaching
children how to make thoughtful book selections is hard work, but it’s not
out of their reach, or ours.
Early mini-lessons on book selection should focus on the ways readers
make good choices. Much of the word on the street has to do with match-
ing kids with books based on such features of text as vocabulary load, sen-
tence length, amount of print on a page, and predictability. I also teach
children to consider
the size of the print: Is it too little? Too big? Just right?
the words and lines on a page: Are there too many? Too few? Just the
right amount?
the pictures: Do they seem like they will help me read the words?
repetition: Is a predictable text what I need?
the words: Can I read all of them? Most of them? None of them at all?
In my years of teaching children how to make thoughtful and appro-
priate choices, however, I’ve learned theres more to book selection than
readability. If we mean it when we say we want children to become lifelong
readers, if we mean it when we say we want children to actively engage in
text for a variety of purposes and for increasingly long periods of time, we
Reading with Meaning
40
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
cant teach them to make book selections based on readability alone. If we
really mean it, we also need to teach children to pay attention to
Content: Whats my schema for this? What do I know about this
topic or story?
Schema: What do I know about myself as a reader and the books in
the classroom to help me make a good choice?
Motivation: How hard am I willing to work to learn to read this
book? (Remember Lauren, the mouse, and Amazing Grace?)
Variety: Have I selected more than one type of text and level of
difficulty?
Content
We all know kids who have extensive knowledge about a specific topic.
Adam is this years dinosaur expert—he’s been passionate about them since
he was three. Now hes six, and hes found his way over to the dinosaur tub.
I dont know the level of the book hes chosen, but it’s clear its way too dif-
ficult for him according to traditional leveling guidelines. As I confer with
him, I learn that not only can Adam read the word dinosaur, but when I
teach him how to activate and apply what he already knows about
dinosaurs, he can also read words like triceratops, stegosaurus, plant eater,
asteroid, and millions of years ago. Because he knows so much about the
topic and his motivation is high, hes able to read a book of greater diffi-
culty than a traditional assessment might indicate.
Think, too, about children who know about certain types of stories.
Caroline, Devon, and Nicole, like Adam and his dinosaurs, know fairy
tales. Because these stories have a language all their own, it’s no surprise that
with only a little nudging, they can read words like “Once upon a time,”
“Whos that sleeping in my bed?” “Not I,” said the pig,” “Trip, trap, trip,
trap,” and “I’ll huff and I’ll puff, and I’ll blow your house down!” The story
lines are so well known to them that they can navigate text that, based on
readability alone, would appear too challenging.
Schema
When we begin to talk about using schema, or prior knowledge, to com-
prehend text, it makes sense to talk with kids about combining what they
know about themselves as readers and what they know about the books
available to them in the classroom to help them make thoughtful choices.
41
Chapter 4: Settling In
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
One day I might read four or five books from the tub labeled “Learn to
Read.” I’ll point out things I notice as I read, and after reading several vol-
umes in this series, children begin to join in with things they notice, too.
When I’ve finished reading, I’ll ask, “So, what do we know about these
kinds of books? Let’s make a list of what we know to help us remember.” I
write “Learn to Read” at the top of the sheet, record the classs thinking,
and tape the sheet on the wall above the tub. In the days to come we do this
for six or seven tubs of books. Throughout the year, children assume
responsibility for researching other tubs of books as they build schema for
new series, authors, or types of text.
I also ask, “What kind of a reader would this type of book be best for?
Do you think these books would be smart choices for kids just learning to
read, those who have had a little more practice reading, or someone who
has been practicing a long time? Why?” We decide that because the print is
large, the songs, rhymes, and stories are familiar, the text is predictable, and
the pictures match the words, the “Learn to Read” books would be good for
kids just learning to read or for someone wanting to read something thats
short and fun.
Connecting what children know about the books in the classroom to
what they know about themselves as readers helps narrow their selections.
When a child knows that he is just starting to read, and that the “Ready Set
Read” books usually contain familiar fairy tales, with only a few sentences on
a page, attractive pictures, and big print, he knows right where to go. Or if a
child is a more fluent reader, and she knows that the “Frog and Toad” books
are about two friends and their adventures, and that the books have quite a
few words on a page and a few pictures, she’ll know she’ll be interested.
Motivation
What was it about the story Amazing Grace that so motivated Lauren to
want to read it? Her story is not as unique as it once was. Now I know more
about the power of the read-aloud and the discussions that ensue, the value
of student choice, the importance of creating literate environments that are
purposeful, accessible, and organized, and the significance of teacher atti-
tudes and expectations.
When I read aloud a favorite book to children, I’m doing more than
reading a good story. I’m showing my love and enthusiasm for reading and
learning, I’m sharing my thinking and inviting children to join me, and I’m
encouraging and expecting students to do the same in their reading. My
message is clear: I love reading. I know you will, too. Let me show you how.
Reading with Meaning
42
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Children know I’m not going to ask them to do something beyond
their capabilities. I want them to succeed, and I offer recommendations
that are just within their reach. And because they trust me to know them
well, they respond in ways that sometimes surprise both of us. Success
begets motivation.
Visitors to our classroom sometimes wonder how children as young as
six, seven, and eight can sustain reading for forty-five or fifty minutes a day.
When children understand that they share in the responsibility for their
learning, when they have a say in the books they read, and when what they
are asked to do has meaning, they are able to read for long stretches at a
time.
When children recommend books to each other, share their thinking
and learning at the end of a workshop, or sign up as an expert on the “Want
to learn to read a new book?” chart, they motivate each other. When several
children decide to tackle a challenging text together, stay in the meeting
area after a read-aloud to reread parts of a text and take the day’s conversa-
tion deeper, they set the standard for thinking and learning in the class-
room.
Variety
Can you imagine reading only professional books, only poetry, or only the
books on the Oprah table? I cant either. But what about limiting kids to
only one level and/or type of text day after day? Thats hard to imagine, too.
I worry when we methodically move children through book after book,
level after level, all to achieve some target number that labels them—and
us—proficient.
I worry about their engagement and enthusiasm for reading and learn-
ing, I worry about their concluding that reading fast is reading well, and I
worry about losing the Adams, the Carolines, the Devons, and the Nicoles
along the way. Readers of all ages need a variety of text type and level of dif-
ficulty.
How do I teach children how to thoughtfully select a variety of text
that meets their needs as readers? I begin by bringing in the odd assortment
of reading thats stacked beside my bed. I show them the Pottery Barn cata-
log and the dog-eared page that shows the quilt I’m thinking of ordering for
my son Noah. I hold up my book group book, Flags of Our Fathers, and
share some of what I’ve written on the sticky notes jutting out everywhere.
They see my Language Arts magazine, and the article where I’ve highlighted
parts I want to remember. I show them I Read It, but I Dont Get It, by Cris
43
Chapter 4: Settling In
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Tovani; This Same Sky, A Collection of Poems from Around the World selected
by Naomi Shihab Nye; and a book called The Hours recommended to me
by my friend Chryse Hutchins.
I talk about how some of my reading is easy for me, like the catalog;
just right, like Language Arts, Flags of Our Fathers, and I Read It, but I Don’t
Get It; and challenging, like The Hours and many of the poems in the
poetry book. I point out the variety of text I’m reading—a magazine, a cat-
alog, a nonfiction text, poetry, and fiction—and my reasons for choosing
them.
Then I say, “Lets take about fifteen minutes right now to make new
book selections. Think about choosing a variety of books, both in the type
of text you are choosing and the level of difficulty. Think about whether
they are easy for you, just right, or challenging. Remember, readers mostly
read books that are just right, but you could decide on an easy one or a
challenging one, too. Think about what you know about yourself as a
reader and the books in the classroom to help you make good choices. Last
of all, make sure you are able to talk about why youve made the choices
youve made. Let me know if I can help.”
Twenty minutes later, the children are seated in a circle, their stacks of
books in front of them. Theyre eager to share their selections. Everyone is
browsing through the various choices; many are sharing their books with
each other. This is exactly what I’d hoped for. I love it when I have a stack
of new books to read, and I want the children to feel the same way.
To help everyone focus I ask a question: “Griffy, would you like to
share your books, and tell us why you chose them?”
“Yes, thank you.” Griffy holds up Little Bear’s Friend by Else
Holmelund Minarik. “Well, you see, I got this one because I’ve read all the
other Little Bears, and this is my last one. Little Bear Books are just perfect
for me. And then this one, Mouse Soup, Mrs. Miller gave it to me because
she thinks it’s just right for me, too, and it’s funny and she knows I like
funny ones. I got this one, Tough Boris, because I have lots of schema for
pirates. It’s cinchy for me, but I still like to read it. Let me show you my
favorite page! I got Mouse Tales because it looks sort of like Mouse Soup, and
it was in the same tub so it’s the same author—theres lots more in there if
you want one, too. And then I found this huge book about space. See?” He
struggles to lift the heavy text. “I know a lot about space. This book looks
like fiction but it’s really nonfiction, and it’s about the planets and all that
stuff were learning about. Remember about Venus, and how its the hottest
planet? It shows how the gases are all trapped up, see, right here? The words
are very tiny and hard for me, but its still good for me.”
Reading with Meaning
44
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
“Wow, Griffy,” I say, “you made some very thoughtful choices! What
do the rest of you notice about Griffys book selection?”
I believe children need to spend their time reading appropriate text—
and I believe we need to broaden our definition of whats appropriate.
Singing and pointing to the words of “Long Tall Texan” with a friend, look-
ing at a shark book and learning from its pictures and captions, and reading
Hush Little Baby by Sylvia Long because youve been working hard and
need a break, are appropriate choices, too.
Now that I’ve modeled and the children have practiced many of the
ways readers make good choices, how else might I support children as they
choose? How else might I ensure that most of their chosen books are at
their instructional level? I take an active role. What’s most effective?
Book talks. About once a week, all year long, right before the mini-les-
son, I showcase three or four books that I know will be just the right match
for specific children. I read the title and the first three or four pages, and I
browse out loud through the book. Then I say, “You know, Matt, I’m think-
ing this book might be perfect for you. Would you like to give it a try?”
Sticky notes. If I know a child might not like a public recommenda-
tion, or if I find a book before or after school that I think would be a good
choice for a child, I often write a personal message on a sticky note, place it
on the cover, and put it in the child’s cubby. I might write, “Hi, Nicole! I
saw this book and thought of you. It’s another version of The Three Billy
Goats Gruff. Let me know what you think of it. Love, Mrs. Miller. P.S.
Whos that tripping over my bridge?”
Read-aloud. Remember to read aloud some of the titles children are
reading, too. Not only does it elevate the status of the book and the status
of the child you recommend it to, but it also gives children a preview of the
text. Once I’ve finished, I’ll say to a child I know would benefit from read-
ing the book, “Grant, would you like to try this one?”
Recommending charts. Though I certainly do my share, I’m not the
only one doing the recommending! Children love recommending books to
each other. To facilitate this process, I divide a large piece of chart paper
into three columns headed “To and From,” “I Recommend,” and “Why?”
Go looking together. Sometimes a child just needs you to take him or
her by the hand to several tubs that you know would offer good choices.
Browse through the books with him, thinking out loud about the kinds of
things you want him to be thinking about when he begins to choose inde-
pendently.
Pick one. Offer three choices, all of which you know are just right. Ask
the child to pick one.
45
Chapter 4: Settling In
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Conferring. Conferences are the best time to talk with children indi-
vidually about books and book selection. If a child is making consistently
poor choices, you can talk about why these choices are not going to help
her become a better reader, and recommend some that would. When you
make recommendations, think out loud about why you think these books
would be just right.
For example, to Sean, who is comfortable reading The Lady with the
Alligator Purse by Nadine Bernard Westcott, Little Green Frog by Beth
Coombe Harris, and The Bear Went over the Mountain by Robert Bingham
Downs day after day, I say during a conference, “Wow, Sean, you really
know these books. How did you learn to read them so well?” He says, “I
just kept practicing.” I say, “That’s so smart. And you know what? I think
youre ready for something a little more challenging. You know how you
can read all the words and you understand everything that is going on?
That tells me youre ready for some books that will help you become an
even better reader. Are you up for a challenge?” The slight nod gives me the
go-ahead. “Let’s go look at the tub of ‘Start off Stories’—do you remember
where they are?”
Sure enough, he leads me to the “Start off Stories” and we have a seat
on the floor. “Remember these books?” I say, pointing to the tub and the
“What do we know about ‘Start off Stories’?” sheet taped above it. “They
have a few more words on the page than your other books, but you have
schema for lots of them already. The pictures match the words, and the text
is predictable. And youre not going to believe this, but some of them are
fairy tales, and I know you like those. See? Heres The Little Yellow Duck
it’s kind of like The Ugly Duckling. And heres The Ant and the Dove—it’s a
good story, too. You want to try The Little Yellow Duck? Wow, I love it when
kids are up for a challenge! Thats so smart.” At this point I’m thinking,
“Come on, Sean, I’m the one doing all the thinking here! Are you listen-
ing?” But I say, “Let’s read a little of it together. . . .”
I check in on Sean now and then to see how hes doing, and I ask him
if hed like to share what he learned about himself as a reader today. He
declines. Unwilling to let the opportunity pass—both for him and for other
kids who could learn from him—I say, “You did such a smart thing today,
Sean. Would you mind if I shared how you tried something new?” He
relents, and in the end decides to do it himself. At share time, Sean tells the
class, “Well, today I got a new book, and here it is. I didnt think I could
read it, but Mrs. Miller thought I could, and I can. I’m going to practice it
some more.” (Hey, maybe he was listening!)
■■■
Reading with Meaning
46
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Once we decide that its important for children to have a say in the books
they read, not only must we teach them how to make wise choices, we must
also make available high-quality selections that offer a wide variety of levels,
topics, and types of text. This probably sounds as though I have a huge col-
lection of books in the classroom. I do. But it hasnt always been that way.
Check out your school and local libraries. They almost always have
great childrens collections, both for reading and thinking aloud and for
independent reading. Get to know librarians—they can be wonderful
resources, and they’ll often let you check out large numbers of books for
long periods of time if they know your purpose. Borrowing books from
libraries also lets you try them out first and decide which ones you might
want to own or order.
Be choosy. Build your collection slowly. For thinking aloud, look for
high-quality literature that is likely to prompt thinking and discussion, has
believable, compelling characters, and deals with real childhood issues,
especially complex ones. When we believe its important for children to
construct meaning by interacting with the text and developing personal
perspectives, we must select books that give them the opportunity to do so.
Childhood is not all happy, not all sad, not all good, and not all bad. Dont
be afraid to let kids know you know this.
Be choosy about what you select for kids to read independently, too.
You dont like Captain Underpants or Scooby Doo? Dont let them invade
your classroom! Children should be reading well-written books that pro-
mote thinking and have believable, compelling characters who talk the way
real people talk and do the things real people do.
Many first graders would give their eyeteeth (if they had them) to
read chapter books. I do have a few in the room, but even if the children
can read them, I dont encourage them to do so—picture books are often
better written and more thought-provoking for young readers. And
besides, what’s the rush? Children have years and years of chapter books
ahead of them.
Beware, too, of the giant boxes of books dropped off in the lounge
from the Kiwanis Clubs annual book drive. I know they mean well, but do
we really want our children learning to read with someone elses old basal
readers, Walt Disneys cartoon versions of the classics, pop-up books that no
longer pop, or picture books scribbled on by a three-year-old long since
grown? Yes, there will be treasures. Just dont get into thinking all books are
equal. Just like the outcast computers that come our way, quality really is
better than quantity!
47
Chapter 4: Settling In
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Evaluation: Mine
Most schools require some sort of baseline assessment of childrens reading
skills at the beginning of the year, and mine is no exception. In first grade
we use the Reader Observation Survey developed by Marie Clay and the
Developmental Reading Assessment (DRA) to evaluate early literacy
achievement. The survey assesses letter identification, concepts of print,
sight words, writing vocabulary, and dictation. The DRA measures a childs
reading level through running records and retellings.
We administer the Reader Observation Survey as needed and the
DRA at the end of the year as well as at the beginning, in order to give
teachers, children, and parents a clear indication of how children have
grown as readers in the areas mentioned above. But how do we measure a
child’s developing expertise in other areas of reading comprehension? Its
very different than evaluating a child’s skills in decoding. I cant give com-
parative levels or numbers to parents and say they represent how their child
has grown in his or her ability to comprehend. I can share what I’ve learned
from children during conferences, observations I’ve written in my note-
book detailing what I’ve seen and heard the children say, and artifacts that
show how children acquire new knowledge and construct meaning.
You’ll find examples of these kinds of responses in the “Evidence of
Understanding and Independence” sections at the end of each strategy
chapter. These sections include a wide range of artifacts—childrens work,
their comments and strategy definitions, and classroom charts weve con-
structed together. You’ll notice that examples of comprehension ability or
development arent tied directly to a childs ability to decode. A child with
few decoding skills can make an amazingly complex inference while reading
a beginning picture book. Likewise, a child who is an accomplished
decoder may struggle to make even the simplest connections from his read-
ing to his life experience. You’ll notice from the syntax and spelling in the
classroom artifacts that the children are clearly beginning readers, yet they
are able to use their developing comprehension skills in sophisticated ways.
I’ve experimented with many different ways of record keeping, and
have finally settled on small 4-by-6-inch notebooks that I keep in a basket
near my desk. There is a notebook for each child, and every day before our
literacy workshops I scoop up four or five from the front of the basket.
Throughout the work sessions, I confer individually with these four or five
children and make notes about what I’ve learned about them as readers,
writers, and learners.
Reading with Meaning
48
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Entries might include words the child wrote on a sticky note, oral
responses, a quick running record, and/or strategies the child uses for decod-
ing and comprehension. I also make note of a childs specific strengths and
areas where he or she needs more support. Listing specific examples from
conferences and observations keeps my comments real and in context, and
puts me back in the scene when I need to refresh my memory.
At the end of each week or so, I look at these notebooks, along with
notes from my own notebook and the childrens response sheets, and deter-
mine if there are children with similar needs who would benefit from addi-
tional support. I meet with small, needs-based groups for fifteen to twenty
minutes during the independent practice part of the workshop. Small
groups may need additional instruction, modeling, and practice making
relevant connections, sounding out words, or working with vocabulary
development. Or a small group may need to challenge themselves by choos-
ing more sophisticated texts, applying a strategy in a new genre, or sharing
their thinking and learning with others.
In these lessons children most often use the same text, but I also ask
them to bring a book they are reading independently. We use like texts so we
have the same point of reference; they bring the books they are reading inde-
pendently so we can make a plan for independent practice. In the lesson, I
model what I want them to practice, and we discuss why its important.
Small groups like these give children opportunities to teach and learn
from each other as they work together to apply and practice strategies for
comprehension, decoding, and meaning of words. We chart our learning
and children share their new insights during share time. Groups stay
together for one, two, or three work sessions over a one- or two-week
period. I meet with just one small group a day as needed, ensuring time to
confer with individual children, too.
What About Phonics and
Word Identification?
My focus in this book is on helping children develop strategies for compre-
hension. But you might be wondering how children learn about letters,
sounds, and words. Some believe it’s not wise to teach young children
strategies for comprehension while they are still learning to decode. I
believe these strategies should be taught side by side.
49
Chapter 4: Settling In
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
In Comprehension Instruction: Research-Based Best Practices (2002),
Pearson and Duke write that “‘comprehension instruction’ and ‘primary
grades’ should appear together often—that comprehension instruction in
the primary grades is not only possible but wise and beneficial rather than
detrimental to overall reading development” (p. 247)
Children love to learn about words and are fascinated by their growing
ability to use them in new ways. To capitalize on this enthusiasm, I use the
same strategies for teaching words as I use for teaching comprehension.
Explicit instruction, modeling, reading high-quality literature and chil-
drens writing, and giving children time to practice real reading and writing
are the cornerstones of my teaching. I find that much of the work we do is
integrated into our whole-group discussions, small-group meetings, and
independent practice sessions every day.
I use the morning message as an opportunity to teach and reinforce
earlier lessons on sentence structure, vocabulary, and strategies for decod-
ing. I record a couple of simple sentences on the dry-erase board, such as
“Good morning everybody. Cory’s mom is coming in to help us today. We
will be working on determining importance, and we get to explore our new
books about the solar system.” We investigate these words and sentences in
a variety of ways. We might focus on identifying sight words, recognizing
spelling patterns, finding little words in big words, chunking sounds
together, or learning word meanings—all using the morning message.
Singing breathes life into the classroom and provides opportunities to
investigate words, letters, and sounds. When the whole class is gathered on
the rug, and we sing “Dr. Seusss ABC’s,” the children learn the names of
the letters and the sounds associated with them. When children listen to
stories, I explain what they can observe about concepts of print and lan-
guage, how stories are structured, and how to figure out the meanings or
words. Or I give children copies of songs weve learned and ask them to
point to the words as we sing, matching voice and print, associating letters
and sounds, and building sight word vocabularies.
In small-group meetings, we often work with spelling patterns or
word families. We begin by talking about a particular spelling pattern, such
as ight. I find several examples in a couple of books and, after discussing the
words, I send the children off to collect their own words with the same pat-
tern. We chart and share our learning. When children recite and read nurs-
ery rhymes, play with tongue twisters, and read snippets of text I’ve retyped
from favorite read-alouds, they develop a sense of the predictability of lan-
guage, the repetitive nature of words, and the relationships between letters
and sounds.
Reading with Meaning
50
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Children have daily opportunities to learn about words and sentences
during independent reading and writing. They learn about sound-symbol
relationships and features of words when I ask them to write down all the
sounds they hear when writing independently. Every moment children
spend reading independently is a time to apply what they know about
words in a real, relevant context. I often transform the snippets of text I’ve
retyped from favorite books and songs into cloze activities. By eliminating
several nouns, for example, or even omitting every sixth or seventh word
from the text, I encourage children to use their developing knowledge of
syntax to fill in the blanks that make sense and sound like language.
I make a point to stop with the class on the way to the lunchroom to
read a few words or sentences from a third grader’s pond project or point
out the words they already know around the lunchroom. When we’re on
our way to a field trip, the children revel in showing me the words they
know from every billboard and fast food restaurant we pass. I know that
they are acquiring a sight word vocabulary they will build on for a lifetime.
While introducing children to the fascinating quirks and essentials in
the world of words, I try to remember that a real context in reading and
writing is just as important when I am teaching comprehension. The most
51
Chapter 4: Settling In
FIGURE 4.1 An
in-progress classroom
chart that shows the
side-by-side teaching
of decoding and
comprehension
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
effective ways to teach comprehension are also the most effective ways to
teach words. I model, think aloud about how I use particular strategies to
figure out unknown words, and list our learning on chart paper. I use a vari-
ety of literature as well as the childrens writing, and I encourage the chil-
dren to think aloud during share time about their success in pronouncing
words they never thought they could.
To emphasize my belief in the side-by-side teaching of decoding and
comprehension, we have a chart in the classroom titled “We are learning
strategies that readers use to construct meaning and decode words” (see
Figure 4.1). The chart is divided into two columns: “What do readers do to
help themselves understand and enjoy their reading?” and “What do read-
ers do when they come to a word they dont know?” We add new learning
and information to the chart throughout the year.
Reading with Meaning
52
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
53
Schema
5
Children combine what
they know about decod-
ing and comprehension
as they read and think
about text.
A reminder to help
children make thoughtful
and appropriate book
selections is always a
good idea.
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
I
t is early October, and I’m getting anxious. “Are they ready?” I wonder.
Twenty-seven first graders sit together on the carpet in our small meet-
ing area. The lamps are lit, the Pumpkin Spice candle is burning, and
my lesson is ready to go. I scan the crowd. Kenta has his hands inside his
bright orange Bronco shirt. Bret is braiding Maggies hair. And Whit is
rolling his socks down, up, then down again.
My mind flashes back to last year’s class. “Were they ever like this?” I
wonder. “Will this group learn to read as well, and think as deeply?” I
remember what my husband said when I ran this by him the night before.
“You say the same thing every year,” he told me, “and then in November,
you cant believe how smart they are.” With his words in my head, I begin.
Thinking Aloud: Showing Kids How
I thought that once I became aware of the thought processes going on
inside my head as I read, modeling this activity—thinking out loud while
reading a picture book to first graders—would be a piece of cake. Not
exactly . . .
I cringe when I think of one particularly awkward attempt, using Eve
Buntings book The Wall. Colleagues had told me what a fabulous book it
was, and I lost no time grabbing it off the shelf of my local library. I flipped
through its pages that night at home, unsure of what I’d say as I read, but
oddly confident that something would come to me.
Nothing did. The next morning in class I heard myself rambling on,
unsure of what to say and making things up as I went. Flustered and embar-
rassed, I realized from this experience that no longer could I continue to
blithely read away, making a comment about beautiful language, throwing
out a question or two, sharing a random connection. No longer could I
grab just any book off the shelf just because it had been recommended to
me, or because it was written by an author I knew and loved. The bar had
been raised. Now, when I model the thought processes proficient readers
use, I’m deliberate. I make sure my think-alouds are genuine, my language
precise, my responses thoughtful. Heres how to make that happen.
Proper planning prevents poor performance! Explicit modeling requires
thoughtful planning. We all know of times in our teaching when we’ve been
able to “wing it,” and sometimes these lessons turn out to be our most bril-
liant. But “winging it” to model our thinking as we read is difficult to pull
off. Ask yourself beforehand, “What do I want kids to understand about
Reading with Meaning
54
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
this strategy? Of all the places in the text where I could authentically think
out loud, which two or three would best illustrate my point? Which ones
am I most comfortable talking about?” Mark those places before your les-
son, and think about what you will say and how you will say it.
Resist the temptation to talk your way through a lesson or figure it out
as you go. Being absolutely clear about the one point youre trying to make
helps drive it home. For example, if the lesson is on making text-to-text
connections, you wont need to share those places where you have ques-
tions, or even text-to-self connections. Be aware of your focus and keep it.
Authenticity matters.I cant fake it. My connections, or questions, or
inferences—whatever the strategy focus happens to be—must be genuine.
Thats why book selection is key; choosing well-written picture books, nar-
rative and informational nonfiction, and poetry that you love and can use
over the course of a year to model a variety of strategies is essential. No mat-
ter how perfect someone else may tell you a book is, or how great a lesson
they taught using it, it wont be perfect for you unless you can connect with
it and put your personal stamp on it in some way. Shopping for books is
akin to shopping for clothes—if we dont take the time to try them on to
see how they fit, they are destined to remain in our closets and on our
shelves.
Use precise language.Be precise when you share your thinking. Say
what you need to say as clearly and concisely as you can, then move on. Use
real language and standard terminology when talking with children; noth-
ing says “inferring” quite like “inferring.” Once youve decided on how
youll define a strategy and how youll format your responses to the reading,
keep your language the same. Remember, youre the model. What you say
and how you say it becomes what they say and how they say it!
■■■
When I begin to teach children how to think out loud, I have the same
expectations for them as I do for myself. I want their think-alouds to be
genuine, their language precise, their responses thoughtful. I start by help-
ing them format their responses. My goal is to give them a framework for
thinking, as well as to help them build a common language for talking
about books. For example, when children share their connections, I ask
them to begin this way: When I read [or heard] these words . . . it
reminded me of . . .” or When I saw the picture of . . . it made me think
about. . . . ”
Asking children to recall the words or point out the picture keeps their
connection text based and gives the rest of us a point of reference as we lis-
55
Chapter 5:Schema
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
ten and learn from their thinking. If a child says only, “My neighbor brings
us flowers,” I might say, “What were the words in the story that made you
think about your neighbor?” If the child doesnt know, I’ll reread the page
and ask him to listen carefully. When he identifies the appropriate section I
say, “So when you heard the words about the lady growing and sharing
flowers with her neighbors, it reminded you of your neighbor who shares
his huge sunflowers with you? Is that right? Now you try it!”
When the children and I share our connections (or mental images,
inferences, questions, and so on) to enhance understanding and construct
meaning, I call it thinking through the text together (Anderson et al. 1992).
This early phase of “having at it” is essential both now and throughout the
year, because here readers have opportunities for activating, building,
changing, and revising their schema as they engage in conversation with
their peers and their teacher.
Early in the year, thinking through text together helps children
become aware of whats going on inside their heads as I read, learn how to
articulate their thinking for themselves and others, and think aloud about
their connections or mental images. Later, as read-alouds and childrens
thinking grow in sophistication, thinking through text together also allows
real opportunities for constructing meaning, reflection, and insight.
Asking children to get eye-to-eye and knee-to-knee is another early
way to have at it, and allows more voices to be heard. When I say, “One,
two, three, eye-to-eye and knee-to-knee,” children turn to someone sitting
close to them and think out loud about something I ask them to discuss
from the read-aloud or mini-lesson. They might share connections, predict
outcomes and explain their reasons for the prediction, create a definition
for a strategy, or even develop a plan for resolving an issue on the play-
ground—anything that gives them practice thinking out loud about their
thinking. This format is also useful when many children want to share, or
when you want to encourage children who are shy or reluctant to share in
the large group.
■■■
Once children understand what theyre being asked to do, youll begin to
see a change in how they respond to the read-alouds. But what do we do
with all this great thinking? How can we “hold thinking”—make it both
permanent and visible?
Recording childrens talk in my notebook and creating large (24-by-
36-inch) charts based on what they have to say is one way to make thinking
permanent and trace our work together. I cant possibly chart everything
Reading with Meaning
56
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
(though I am known as the “chart lady” in some circles), but I do create
anchor charts” after lessons from which I want children to remember a
specific strategy or concept. I write a note of explanation at the top of the
chart and note snippets of conversation, individual comments, and state-
ments that reflect our work together.
Anchor charts make our thinking permanent and visible, and so allow
us to make connections from one strategy to another, clarify a point, build
on earlier learning, and simply remember a specific lesson.
The First Schema Lesson
“Girls and boys, you know how weve been learning about what good read-
ers do when they come to a word they dont know? Well, today we are going
to begin learning about what good readers do to better understand and
have fun with their reading. Do you know that great readers think and read
at the same time? You do? That’s so smart! Teachers know that, too, and
weve learned that one of the most important things readers do when they
read is to make connections from what they already know to information in
the text.
“Thinking about what you already know is called using your schema, or
using your background knowledge. Schema is all the stuff that’s already
inside your head, like places youve been, things youve done, books youve
read—all the experiences youve had that make up who you are and what
you know and believe to be true. When you use your schema, it helps you
use what you know to better understand and interact with the text.”
I look out at Whit and notice his socks still require attention. Kentas
hands are outside his Bronco shirt, but now theyre picking rocks out of the
soles of his orange and blue Nikes, making little piles. Bret’s braiding
appears to be nearing completion.
“There are many ways readers use schema, but today we are going to
talk about just one way: using schema to make connections from our read-
ing, or the text, to ourselves. We’ll call these text-to-self connections. When
you make connections when you read, it’s kind of like having a conversa-
tion going on in your head.”
Twenty-seven blank faces stare up at me. Two parents have joined us;
make that twenty-nine. I forge ahead. “Let me show you what I mean. I’m
going to read a story to you; its title is The Relatives Came by Cynthia
Rylant. I’ll read for a while, then I’ll stop and think out loud to show you
57
Chapter 5: Schema
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
how I use my schema, or what I already know, to make connections from
my life to the story. I’m going to let you know what’s going on inside my
head while I’m reading the story out loud to you.”
To avoid confusion between reading and thinking, I tell them, “When
I’m holding the book up like this, I’ll be reading. When the book is down
on my lap like this, I’ll be thinking out loud. Are you ready?”
Text-to-Self Connections
“This page makes me laugh. You see right here, where I read to you, ‘It was
different, going to sleep with all that new breathing in the house’? I under-
stand exactly what Cynthia Rylant meant. Thats because at the same time I
was reading, I was making a connection to when I was a little girl, remem-
bering how my family and all my cousins and aunts and uncles would visit
my grandparents in their farmhouse on old Route 92 near Oskaloosa, Iowa.
“Sometimes it was so hot and sticky at night that wed all pile down to
the living room—just like in this picture—because it was the only air-con-
ditioned place in the house. Wed sleep together on the black carpet with
the pink and red roses intertwined, listening to Aunt Rosies scary Melvin
stories and dreaming of Shetland pony rides, the midway at the state fair,
and Grandmas gingerbread boy or girl pancakes.”
As soon as I’ve shared my connection to the text, I say, “Did you
notice how much fun I was having just thinking about being with my
cousins and sleeping downstairs on those hot Iowa nights? I’ll probably
always remember The Relatives Came because of all the connections I make
while I’m reading it.”
When I get to the page where the relatives are heading back to
Virginia and everyone is waving good-bye, I read it, then put the book in
my lap.
“I love this part. When I saw the picture of the people standing in
their pajamas and waving the relatives off in the dark, right away I began to
think about a good-bye game my grandma and I used to play. It was called
‘Kissed You Last.’ When we’d get up so early in the morning to drive back
to Colorado, my grandma and I would always see who would get to kiss the
other one last. I would always win, because I kept blowing kisses all the way
down the lane and onto the highway! I loved playing that game. Do you see
how using my schema helped me understand just how the people in the
book feel?”
Reading with Meaning
58
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
As the story ends, I notice I have everyones attention. The two parents
are smiling. Encouraged, I cant wait to talk about what the children are
thinking. “So what did you notice?” I ask. Only Cory raises his hand. “Can
we go read now?” he asks. “Oh, brother,” I’m thinking, but I say with a
smile, “Absolutely. Happy reading, everyone!”
Over the next two weeks there will be similar lessons. I think aloud on
consecutive days—Julie Brinkloes Fireflies and Gloria Houstons My Great-
Aunt Arizona are two favorites. By this time children are usually itching to
have their say, and while I continue to model my connections, I encourage
them to share theirs, too. This is when we begin thinking through the text
together and getting eye-to-eye and knee-to-knee. Koala Lou by Mem Fox,
The Snowy Day by Ezra Jack Keats, and Chrysanthemum by Kevin Henkes
never fail to engage kids and get them connecting.
At this point I begin scripting and charting their responses. Kids love
to see their connections (and their name) in print, and it shows them how
much I value what they have to say. Charting holds thinking—it makes our
thinking public and permanent, and traces our work together.
Making Meaningful Connections
When I first began teaching children about using their schema to help
them make connections to text, they connected to everything! I remember
children waving their hands wildly, making the dreaded “Uunh! Uunh!
Uunh!” sound, barely able to contain themselves. When I’d call on them,
they might say something like, “I have a connection! You know the author
of the book?” And I’d say, “You mean Eve Bunting?” “Yeah. Well my
cousins name is Eve.” “Really?” I’d say, and on we’d go. And there’d be other
comments, like, “I have a red dress, too,” or, in response to a picture of a
tiny bird in the upper corner of an illustration, “I once had a bird.” Then
another child would say, “You had a bird? I have a bird right now! His name
is Sal.” And then, “Sal? That’s a girl’s name!” Giggles ensue. By this time,
neither Eve Bunting nor I could get the kids back.
It’s not that I now get only brilliant, meaningful connections from
children—every year someone knows an Eve or has a red dress, too, or even
once had a bird. But I’ve learned it’s up to me to teach through these kinds
of connections. Now I know its up to me to gently redirect the childrens
tangential responses right away before they become the norm.
59
Chapter 5: Schema
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Thinking Through Text Together:
An Anchor Chart in the Making
I begin a mini-lesson several days later this way: “You know how weve been
talking about the difference between connections that help us with our reading
and the ones that dont? I have an idea that might help us. Today when I’m
reading aloud to you, I’m going to record your connections in my notebook,
and after school I’ll write them on a chart so you can see them. Tomorrow we’ll
talk about them and figure out which kinds of connections help us most.”
After school I transfer all the childrens responses to a chart, which
reads as follows:
We have been learning that expert readers make connections
from the text to themselves to better understand their reading.
When we read Hazel’s Amazing Mother by Rosemary Wells, we
made these text-to-self-connections:
I helped the mailman once.
I have a calico cat.
I once got lost in the mall and I was so scared!
My grandma made me a doll.
I have new shoes, too.
My neighbor’s name is Hazel.
Once my sister was playing and the big kids took her ball. My
dad came out and told them to go home.
Belles story about her mom and “the power of love.”
The next day we decide to put a “1” next to each response that helped us
with the text and a “2” next to responses that didnt help us. I tell the children
that as I reread the story, they should think about the connections we made
yesterday and try to figure out which ones help us understand the story best.
“Let’s look at the first one,” I say when I finish reading. “‘I helped the
mailman once.’ Does that help us learn more about the story?” A chorus of
nos. (I put a 2 there.)
And this one: ‘I have a calico cat.’ Do you think that connection will
help us?” More nos. (Another 2.)
“What about this? ‘I once got lost in the mall and I was so scared!’
Does this one help us?” Olivia answers, “It could help. Put a 1 there.” I
think to myself, “A 1? Whats meaningful about the mall?” But I say, “Keep
talking, Olivia. Tell us why you think there should be a 1 there.”
Reading with Meaning
60
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
“Well, if you had really ever been lost in the mall, it would help you
understand how Hazel felt when she got lost. You would get it.” Wow, I
think, shes right! And I wonder: How many times have I missed opportu-
nities like this one? How many times have I not pursued a child’s thinking
simply because it didnt fit with mine?
I think, “Thank you, Olivia!” but I say, “What are the rest of you
thinking? Put a thumb up if you agree with Olivia.” Twenty-six thumbs
come up, and though I understand they all dont get it, I know that some of
them learned something from Olivia just now, and there will be more
opportunities just like this one.
We go on down the chart, marking 1’s and 2’s as we go. When we fin-
ish, I ask, “What can we learn from all this great thinking we just did?”
Taylor, who up to now has just been listening, says, “Well, I think that
when something is only on one page, and you make a connection to it, and
then it just gets, umm, well, it just kinda gets swept out of the story, that
connection isnt going to help you much.”
Justin looks at Taylor and says, “Yeah, ’cause its not so much about
the story—it’s not a very big connection.” “Yeah,” Taylor nods. “A tiny lit-
tle connection isnt going to help you much.”
“Taylor and Justin,” I say, “I loved the way you two just had a conver-
sation, and I think I see what you mean. Boys and girls, how do you think
we might write that on our chart?”
Kendal answers, “How ’bout if we connect to a word, like mailman or
cat or soccer ball, that doesnt really help us, but if we connect to a bigger
thing, like if it’s on almost all the pages and it’s what the book is really
about, like an idea or something, then it can help you.”
“Let’s see if I’ve got it,” I say. “Do you mean that if we make a connec-
tion to a word, like mailman, or maybe someone’s name, it probably wont
be as helpful as connecting to something the book keeps coming back to,
like a big idea? Taylor, Justin, Kendal, everybody, do we have it?” Heads
nod, and I record it on the Hazel chart.
“My husband was right,” I think. “Its not even November, and
already I cant believe how smart they are!”
Releasing Responsibility:
Small-Group Work
Once I know what I want children to do in small groups, I need to think
through each lesson carefully. What words will I use to explain the lesson
61
Chapter 5: Schema
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
and its procedures clearly? What language will best convey my thinking and
serve as a model for theirs? What must I do to ensure that when their work
together begins, the tone of the classroom is not broken by children who
dont know what to do, where to go, or what to do when theyre finished?
I’m explicit. I let children in on what we’ll be doing and why, what it
will look like, and my expectations for their work together.
It’s 10 .., and children are sprawled every which way on the worn,
warehouse-issue carpet. They are in groups of threes and fours, clustered
around three-foot-square pieces of white butcher paper. Arms and legs,
markers and crayons, are everywhere.
Before reading aloud Ira Sleeps Over by Bernard Waber, I tell the children,
“Today while I’m reading, I want you to keep your connections inside your
heads.” I explain that once the story is over, they will go to one of the big pieces
of paper on the floor (one child to a side, four to a group), talk together about
their connections to the story, and record their most important one using pic-
tures, words, or both. There is a copy of the book for each group (this isnt
essential, but the multiple copies do help focus and support young readers).
As the children work in their groups, I talk with a few, but mostly I lis-
ten. Now, and during share time, I do some informal assessment. I want to
know things like
Are children making real connections to the story?
Do they understand how these connections help them?
What kind of language do they use when they talk to each other in
small groups?
I listen in on Whit, Ana, Maggie, and Cory. They are busy arranging
the paper just so, deciding who will sit where, and arguing about where the
exact middle of the paper is so they can place the markers there. Whit turns
his back to the group and at least begins to flip through the book, but the
conversation for Maggie, Cory, and Ana turns to crayons.
I’m groaning inside. Wheres that great talk I know they’re capable of?
But I resist getting in the middle of it. I glance around the room to see how
the other groups are doing and decide to stay where I am. I listen in again.
Ana is talking. “Remember the part of the story when he wanted his teddy
bear but it was at home? Well, that part reminded me of when I didnt have
my teddy bear, and I really wanted it. Remember when everyone had lice?
My mom made me put all my stuffed animals in a big trash bag and I
couldnt sleep with anything for a whole week! It was terrible. That’s what
I’m going to write about. Then I’ll make a big trash bag right here . . .”
Reading with Meaning
62
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
I start itching again (how long do lice live, anyway?), but Cory,
Maggie, and Whit are writing and drawing. Relieved, I remember that it
often takes adults a while to get focused—why should it be any different for
children? I check in with the other groups and notice Jake has drawn a pic-
ture of a little boy in a bed (Jake) and a little boy in the doorway waving
good-bye (Keenan). He writes, “The first time I went to Keenans house for
a sleep-over, I wasnt homesick. But when he came to my house, he was.
Hes coming again, and I hope he makes it.” Many children have drawn
pictures of teddy bears, best friends, and beds.
About thirty minutes later, the big papers are stacked in the middle of
our meeting area, the children seated in a large circle around them. “Let’s
have the group whose paper is on top tell us about their connections first,”
I tell them. “Sit on the side of the paper that shows your work.”
As the small groups share, I discover that many children are making
connections to the story and are able to share them with others. I recognize
that fewer are able to think aloud about how making connections helps
them as readers, and most of those who do use my words (“It helps me
understand how Ira feels”). I remind myself (again) that children can use a
strategy without fully understanding it and that they will gradually gain
control of it through continued modeling and guided practice.
Text-to-Text Connections
When most children are able to make meaningful text-to-self connec-
tions—primarily in response to read-alouds and small-group work, but
sometimes also in their own reading—I begin to model and think aloud
about how and why readers use their schema to make connections from one
text to another. It’s tempting at this point to forgo thinking aloud to show
kids how. I used to assume that once children had become successful at
making text-to-self connections, the rest would come naturally. Not any-
more! Now, when I think about gradually releasing responsibility, I realize
that children—and teachers, too—move in and out of all phases (thinking
aloud, having at it, and letting go) several times during the teaching of each
strategy. Whenever I teach something new, I’ve learned to take the time to
be explicit and show children how.
Amazing Grace by Mary Hoffman and Tomie dePaolas Oliver Button
Is a Sissy are a good pair of books to read aloud and demonstrate how mak-
ing text-to-text connections can help readers construct meaning and
63
Chapter 5: Schema
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
enhance understanding. I read Oliver Button first, and we talk through the
text together, making connections about teasing, bullies, talent shows, and
moms and dads. The next day I read Amazing Grace. By way of introduc-
tion, I tell the children that theyre getting so good at making text-to-self
connections, I want to teach them how readers make other kinds of con-
nections, too. “Let me show you what I mean . . .”
When we get to the part where Raj tells Grace she cant be Peter Pan
because she isnt a boy and Natalie whispers that Grace cant be Peter Pan
because shes black, I stop reading, put the book in my lap, and think aloud.
“You know, when I read these last two pages, where Raj told Grace she
couldnt be Peter Pan because she isnt a boy and Natalie said she couldnt
because Peter Pan isnt black, it reminded me of the book Oliver Button Is a
Sissy. Do you remember the part where all the boys are making fun of him
because he loves to dance? Look—see right here? I’m thinking of Oliver
Button at the same time I’m reading about Amazing Grace, and I’m think-
ing theyre alike in some ways. When it said that Grace keeps her hand up
to be Peter Pan, even when Natalie and Raj didnt think she could be, I
remembered that Oliver Button didnt give up, either, just because those
boys were teasing him.
“When readers do what I just did—when they make a connection
from a book that theyre reading to one theyve read before—thats called
making a text-to-text connection. Making text-to-text connections, or con-
nections from one book to another book, can help you understand the new
story and make predictions about what may happen based on what you
know from the other story. Lets keep reading and see what happens next.”
When we get to the part where the class meets for auditions, I put the
book down again. “Right now, I’m predicting Grace is going to be Peter Pan
in the play. You know why I’m thinking that? Remember my earlier connec-
tions to Oliver Button, and how he practiced and practiced, just like Grace
did? And even though he didnt win first prize in the talent show, things
worked out for him and the boys didnt tease him anymore? I think it might
be the same for Grace, too. I think she’ll be chosen to play Peter Pan in the
school play, and I predict that Natalie and Raj are going to realize that what
they said to her was wrong and start being nicer to her. What do you think?”
The classs prediction is unanimous, and is later confirmed. At the end
of the story, when I ask the kids what they noticed as I was making text-to-
text connections, Whit says, “I saw you doing lots of things, like stopping
to think, making predictions, and making connections to Oliver Button.”
“Wow,” I think, as I record his words. “What a difference a couple of weeks
makes!” But I say, “Good noticing, Whit! Anyone else?”
Reading with Meaning
64
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Text-to-text connections go beyond comparing characters, of course;
but for early readers, its the perfect place to begin. Creating Venn diagrams
to compare characters or other features in pairs of books can show children
in a very visual way how text-to-text connections help the reader make pre-
dictions and enhance understanding. (Figure 5.1 shows my charting of con-
nections between Oliver Button and Amazing Grace; Figure 5.2 shows
Emilys own Venn diagram of connections between Now One Foot, Now the
Other by Tomie dePaola and The Two of Them by Aliki. You’ll find that chil-
dren also love to compare different versions of the same story, particularly
fairy tales; and stories or other texts by the same author.
Schema Throughout the Year
Schema doesnt end with text-to-self and text-to-text connections.
Throughout the year I teach children to use and develop their schema for
making text-to-world connections and exploring individual authors, partic-
65
Chapter 5: Schema
FIGURE 5.1 Venn diagram of the class’s connections between Amazing Grace by Mary
Hoffman and Oliver Button Is a Sissy by Tomie dePaola
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
ular types of text, text features and characteristics, and topics of interest to
the children.
Text-to-World Connections
I teach children about making text-to-world connections by listening and
paying attention to what they have to say and being aware of whats going
on in the world. I used to think children as young as six, seven, and eight
neednt wrestle with real-world issues such as war, homelessness, poverty, and
prejudice. But when it’s the buzz on the playground and in the lunchroom,
when it’s blaring from radios, televisions, and newspapers, it’s time to talk.
I’ve learned that children love to grapple with complex social and
moral issues, and they often have clearer heads than some grown-ups I
know! Sometimes I search for just the right book to help me launch the dis-
cussion; other times a read-aloud will spark a discussion about something I
hadnt planned. Memorable text-to-world connections include
Kevans connection between Smoky Night by Eve Bunting and the
mini-riots the night the Broncos won the Super Bowl.
Reading with Meaning
66
FIGURE 5.2 Emilys connections between Now One Foot, Now the Other by Tomie dePaola
and The Two of Them by Aliki
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Aileys connection between I Have a Dream by Mike Francen and a
swastika that was burned onto our school’s playing field.
Maxs connection between Miss Maggie by Cynthia Rylant and his
aunt who has Alzheimer’s disease.
Taylor and Keenans connection between How Many Days to America?
by Eve Bunting and the war in Kosovo.
Lilli’s connection between Lifetimes by Bryan Mellonie and Robert
Ingpen and the rampage at Columbine High School.
Edwards connection between a newspaper article about fighting in
the Balkans and gang activity in his neighborhood.
Childrens connections between a magazine article about the
September 11 tragedy in New York City and our own class “Promise
to Each Other.”
Building Schema for Authors, Types of Text, and
Text Elements
Because most early readers have limited schema for individual authors,
types of text, and text features and characteristics, I work throughout the
year to build schema in these areas. Teaching children to activate what they
know when they
encounter a book by a familiar author
select a picture book, songbook, or early reader
read poetry, narrative, or expository text
helps them know what to expect and how best to go about reading and
making sense of a particular text. I have three charts displayed and we add
to them whenever we become familiar with an author, learn about a differ-
ent type of text, or work with characteristics and features that are unique to
poetry, narrative, or expository text.
Topic Study: Activating, Building, and Revising Schema
Whenever we begin a new topic of study, I begin by asking, “So what’s our
schema for this? What do we know about —?” To help children activate
what they already know I sometimes liken the schema to opening mental
files in their heads. I tell them that sometimes we have to stop and think
about what we already know; we have to search our brains for that mental
file, open it, and make connections between what we know and the new
67
Chapter 5: Schema
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
information. I show the children some of my paper files, as well as those
I’ve created on the classroom computer. I model how I make new files, add
information to existing files, and revise and delete information.
“The files in your brain are a lot like these files,” I tell them. “You can
work with them the same way. Lets try it. Remember yesterday when
Maggie asked the question, ‘Why do leaves change color?’ Open your men-
tal files right now—what information do you already have in your head
that would help answer her question?” I record each response on a 5-by-7-
inch sheet of paper and place the sheet in a paper file labeled “Why do
leaves change color?”
The next day I read aloud a text on the subject and as we encounter
new information, I write it down and add it to the file created the day
before. When we finish, we open the file and look closely at our thinking
and learning. We determine what information should be kept in the file
and what information should be crossed out or deleted. Figure 5.3 shows a
chart that records this process.
Reading with Meaning
68
FIGURE 5.3 A schema
chart
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
69
Chapter 5: Schema
When you use
schema, it’s like
adding things together.
Say you see leaves
falling. You think in
your head, ‘Oh, it’s
fall now!’ It’s kind of
like your old schema
comes out of your head
and grabs the new
schema and pulls it
back inside your
head.”
Christopher
Schema is what you
know; its your think-
ing.”
Madi
When you change
your thinking about
something, you change
your schema.
Devon
Everything you hear
and see and feel,
everyplace you go and
everything you do,
puts more schema into
your head.
Grant
Evidence of Understanding and Independence
Nicoles connection to I Know a Lady by Charlotte Zolotow
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Reading with Meaning
70
When you use your
schema, it wakes up
memories.”
Nina
It’s impossible to have
the same schema as
someone else. People
do different things, go
different places, and
read different books,
so how could their
schema be the same?”
Cory
So let’s say you know
about something, you
have some schema for
it. Then you hear
something new about
it. You add the new
stuff and your schema
just gets bigger and
bigger.”
Ben
When you have
schema for something,
you have to open up
that file in your brain
and make connections
to your reading or
writing or math.”
Bret
Abbys connection to No Jumping on the Bed by Tedd Arnold
Ninas connection to Roxaboxen by Alice McLerran
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Schema at a Glance
Whats Key for Kids?
Readers activate their prior knowledge before, during, and after reading.
Readers use schema to make connections between the text and their
lives, between one text and another, and between the text and the
world.
Readers distinguish between connections that are meaningful and rel-
evant and those that arent.
71
Chapter 5: Schema
(Left column) Emilys connection to Amelia Bedelia Goes Camping by Peggy Parish;
(upper right) Whit’s connection to Just Me and My Dad by Mercer Mayer; (lower
right) Chriss connection to Hansel and Gretel
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Readers build, change, and revise their schema when they encounter
new information in the text, engage in conversations with others, and
gain personal experience.
Readers use their schema to enhance understanding.
(Adapted from Keene and PEBC)
Tried and True Texts for Schema
Fireflies by Julie Brinkloe
Hazel’s Amazing Mother by Rosemary Wells
I Know a Lady by Charlotte Zolotow
Ira Sleeps Over by Bernard Waber
Koala Lou by Mem Fox
My Great-Aunt Arizona by Gloria Houston
Now One Foot, Now the Other by Tomie dePaola
Oliver Button Is a Sissy by Tomie dePaola
The Relatives Came by Cynthia Rylant
Roxaboxen by Alice McLerran
The Snowy Day by Ezra Jack Keats
The Two of Them by Aliki
Reading with Meaning
72
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
73
Creating
Mental
Images
6
Madison and Camille
offer greetings and
poems during
Coffeehouse Poetry Day.
Matthew works hard to
create mental images as
he listens to My Father’s
Dragon by Ruth Stiles
Gannet.
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
T
he muted trumpet of Miles Davis plays on the CD player, floating
among the voices in the crowded classroom. Hot chocolate sim-
mers in the PTAs relic of a coffeepot; a mountain of miniature
marshmallows fills a bowl nearby. Long rolls of deep blue paper decorated
with construction paper stars, coffee cups, planets, flowers, hearts, and cres-
cent moons cover the windows and darken the room. Table lamps and tiny
white lights draped from the ceiling provide the only light.
Freshly scrubbed tables are rearranged into cozy groups of two.
Handmade flowers in tiny clay pots, poetry books, bowls of pretzels, and
small containers of words from magnetic poetry kits have replaced crayons,
markers, scissors, sticky notes, pencils, and glue.
Parents and children sit together, munching pretzels and sipping
steamy hot chocolate in mugs brought from home, reading poetry by the
likes of Eloise Greenfield, Maya Angelou, Aileen Fisher, Jane Yolen, Valerie
Worth, and Georgia Heard. But the poems receiving the most enthusiastic
reviews? Theyre the ones written by the children themselves, published and
bound into books with enough copies for everyone.
Black is the clothing color of choice; berets adorn the heads of the
truly hip. Starbucks, you say? No way! Weve transported ourselves back to
the 1960s (ancient history to everyone in the room but me) and its
Coffeehouse Poetry Day in Room 104.
It’s time to begin. I know because the sixth child has just asked me
when were going to start, and I see numbers seven and eight approaching.
I give Frank a wink and a nod. He walks to the makeshift stage—a table
with two chairs taped on top, a red step stool to get there, and a well-used
microphone gleaned from an enterprising custodian. He climbs the steps
and sings into the microphone, “Everybody listen!” The response is deafen-
ing: “Right now!” Startled parents look up, stunned at their childrens
silence. Finally, they, too, stop talking. This signals Madison to the stage.
Microphone in hand, she begins. “Welcome, parents, children, and
friends, to our Coffeehouse Poetry Day. Weve been learning how readers
and writers create mental images when they read and write. When we read
our poems, we want you to see if you can create some mental images, too.
Listen and wait for the pictures to come alive in your minds.”
Abby begins. “Hi, everyone! I’m Abby and the title of my poem is
‘Dolphins.’ Dolphins dive / into the ocean. / Flippity flop! / Splishity splash! /
Dolphins never stop. / Twisting, twirling / in the shining sunlight, / all day
long.” One by one, and sometimes in twos, children extend greetings and read
their poems into the microphone. I’m at the ready, turning up the volume of
Miless muted trumpet between poems, turning it down as children read.
Reading with Meaning
74
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Icicles
Icicles drip
in the morning light,
and freeze
in the darkness
of the night.
Icicles scream
as if they were talking
to the wind.
Caroline
Trains
Trains rumble over tracks.
Big black tunnels wait.
Dark metal zooms
through the night.
Zach
Henry
When I hold my Guinea Pig
Henry
he makes me feel
safe inside.
Warm fur
red eyes
chubby little body.
Henry is my buddy.
Olivia
The Changes of the World
When winter falls,
it seems like years have passed.
Layers and layers of rock
lay silent
on the stiff, brown ground. I look out
my bedroom window.
It seems like things have changed
in the world,
and people have gotten older.
Zachary
75
Chapter 6: Creating Mental Images
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Hot Tubs
Hot tubs,
steamy bubbles,
powerful jets,
ZOOM like shallow waves
in the ocean.
San Diego hot tubs,
that’s where I want to be!
Griffin
Poppy
I remember my Grandpa.
I used to go everywhere hed go.
He fixed me really good bacon.
I used to love to sleep next to him.
I really miss my Poppy.
Cory
Space
In space
stars twinkle
in the darkness of night.
Saturns rings twirl
and planets swirl
as if they were dancing.
Emily
Sunday Morning on CBS
Football people
race across the field,
leaping to tackle you
to the green and grassy ground.
Devon
Leaves
The leaves
tiptoe to the ground
with only a soft, gentle sound.
We hear the leaves go
crinkle, crackle,
Reading with Meaning
76
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
crunch, crunch
under our feet.
We rake them into a mountain
of red, orange,
yellow, brown and purple.
The leaves
tiptoe to the ground
with only a soft, gentle sound.
Madison and Camille
When you read about Coffeehouse Poetry Day just now, did you find
yourself creating images in your head? Maybe you visualized a classroom
(yours?) with tiny white lights overhead, or pictured twenty-seven children
and their parents dressed in black. Maybe you caught a whiff of the hot
chocolate and heard the notes of a trumpet, or the childrens boisterous
“Right now!” And just maybe you noticed a lump in your throat when you
read Corys poem about his Poppy.
When readers create mental images, they engage with text in ways that
make it personal and memorable to them alone. Anchored in prior knowl-
edge, images come from the emotions and all five senses, enhancing under-
standing and immersing the reader in rich detail (Keene and Zimmermann
1997).
In the Beginning: Thinking Aloud
A favorite book for thinking aloud about creating mental images is Night
Sounds, Morning Colors by Rosemary Wells. The inside flap issues an invita-
tion: “Look. Listen. Open all your senses.” Who could resist? Violets laugh
and sing in Mamas garden, a father hums “Danny Boy” as he tucks his
little boy into bed, a train whistles through the darkness of the night.
“Listen again to the words about the faraway train and its whistle,” I
say to the children during the read-aloud. “When I read those words, such
vivid images, or pictures, come into my mind. I have an image of my
mother, brother, and me streaking across the flatlands of Kansas on a train
called the El Capitán. I see us looking up at the night sky through the sky-
lights above us, my brother and I thinking we could count the stars. I hear
the rumble of the wheels on the tracks, and the porters in their fancy red
and black outfits talking in whispers outside our compartment.
77
Chapter 6: Creating Mental Images
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
“Even now I can feel the excitement of going to the dining car for break-
fast. I have images of starched white tablecloths, deep red napkins the size of
my mother’s silk scarves, fragrant fresh flowers in silver vases, and more
knives, forks, and spoons at each setting than one little girl could possibly use.
And the cinnamon rolls! My image of them fills an entire plate, with yummy
white frosting slowly oozing down into little puddles at the bottom.
“Girls and boys, did you notice how creating mental images seemed to
make the text come alive for me? It’s like I was back on the El Capitán,
streaking across the countryside, looking up at the stars, sitting down in
that fancy dining car, and eating those yummy cinnamon rolls all over
again. The page about the train will always be important to me—I’ll always
remember it—because of my connections to it and the images they create
in my mind. Someone else reading the book would have different images,
because that persons schema is different. No one else, not even my mother
or brother, would remember those train rides the same way I do.”
I take a couple of days with the Wells book, sharing one or two pages
each day and talking about how the images I create enhance my reading
and understanding of the text. On day three, I say to the children, “Lie
down, close your eyes, and listen to the words as I read. Pay attention to the
images that come alive in your mind. Put your thumb up when an image
comes into your head.”
Theyre into it. Flat on the floor, eyes scrunched shut, they wait with
anticipation. I read the fish page, and one tiny thumb after another shoots
up, vying for attention. Not only do they see fish weaving in and out of
pagodas, as in the book, but they become fish right before my eyes! Big fish
with bulging eyes, puckered lips, and swishing tails squirm (swim?) around
the meeting area.
A fish named Frank stops midstream and says, “Wait a minute, guys.
What’s a pagoda?” And before I know it, four children try to fashion one
with their bodies. Emily says, “Look, Frank, see? It’s one of those tall
Chinese-like houses—you know, the ones with the curvy roofs? I have one
in my fish tank, and the fish really do swim in and out of the windows and
the doors. Swim through this door right here!” Frank swishes right through.
I think, “Well, Debbie, this isnt quite what youd expected, but what’s
happening is a good thing, right? Uh . . . right.” I’m grateful it wasnt a page
full of tigers.
The page with the birthday cake sends thumbs flying once again.
They can see that birthday cake!
“How many candles are on your cake?” I ask.
“Seven! And theyre burning hot and bright! Ouch! I just touched one!”
Reading with Meaning
78
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
“My cake has just one candle, but it’s a big red number three right in
the middle. It’s my baby brothers cake.”
“The cake in my head is big and round and it has a soccer player on it.
There are words. Let’s see . . . they say [eyes closing tight]—oh! I see them
now!—they say ‘Happy Birthday, Paige’ and ‘Youre Number One!’”
Next I ask, “What kind of cake is in your image?”
“Chocolate!”
“No! Mines white with lemon filling, my favorite!”
“Wait! Listen to this! I see an angel food cake with white frosting and
pink and red hearts all over it, and seven purple candles and it tastes deli-
cious!”
“Oohs” and “aahs” and “Are we going to have snack?” and “Whens
lunch?” (two long hours from now) let me know it’s time for a change of
pace.
“Wow, you created some very vivid mental images—I loved all the
details you included,” I tell them. “What did you notice about your images
of the birthday cakes?”
“Everybody saw a different kind of birthday cake!”
“Youre right. They were all different. Why do you suppose that is?”
They chorus as one, “Because our schema is different!”
“Good thinking. I can tell youre going to be really good at this. One
last thing. Before you go to read, I’m interested in knowing what youre
thinking about creating mental images so far. Any thoughts? Ideas?
Questions?”
My pencil and notebook are ready. “It’s so much fun!” and “I love
making mental images!” and “Can we practice again tomorrow?” are typical
responses, but Kentas thoughts take my breath away. “Well, heres what I’m
thinking. I’m thinking mental images are sort of like connections, only a lot
bigger. Say a connection is like a kernel of corn. But when you put it in the
microwave and it pops up big and hot, now that’s a mental image. You hear
it and see it and smell it and taste it and love it. That’s what I’m thinking.”
The room is silent; the only sound is that of my pencil furiously writing
to catch every word. Madison asks, “Did you get that exactly, Mrs. Miller?
We should put it up in the room somewhere.” Kenta knows just the spot.
Focusing on just a snippet or two from a picture book or poem allows
children time to practice developing an image completely. Asking questions
like “How many candles are on your cake?” and “What kind is it?” gives
children permission to add details that personalize their images and make
them unique. Books such as Night in the Country by Cynthia Rylant, The
Salamander Room by Anne Mazer, Quiet, Please by Eve Merriam, Say
79
Chapter 6: Creating Mental Images
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Something by Mary Stoltz, The Napping House by Audrey Wood, Creatures of
Earth, Sea, and Sky by Georgia Heard, and anything by Joanne Ryder also
offer rich snippets of text for thinking aloud, thinking through text together,
and getting eye-to-eye and knee-to-knee to talk about mental images.
In addition to picture books, what type of text is best when children
begin to become more adept at making mental images on their own? What
type of text bridges whole-group work and independence? The answer is
poetry. Short, thought-provoking, and full of images, poetry allows even
early readers to navigate the text once its been read aloud several times. I’ve
learned that the best decoders arent necessarily the most thoughtful readers,
nor are the most thoughtful readers necessarily the best decoders. Asking
children to read and respond to the same text creates additional opportuni-
ties for children with different strengths to listen and learn from each other.
Anchor Lessons
The lessons that follow show how I use a given text to deepen childrens
understanding of the strategy of making mental images. Using poetry and
picture books, children practice creating and adapting images in their
minds, and make them concrete through artistic, dramatic, and written
responses. Children explore how
images are created from readers’ schema and words in the text
readers create images to form unique interpretations, clarify thinking,
draw conclusions, and enhance understanding
readers’ images are influenced by the shared images of others
images are fluid; readers adapt them to incorporate new information
as they read
evoking vivid mental images helps readers create vivid images in their
writing.
Images are created from readers’ schema and words in the text
(artistic response)
I make ten or so copies of three or four poems I know children will love—
those written by children from previous years are perfect. I think about the
content of the poems I choose. Do children have enough schema for the topic?
Is the text clear? Do the poems lend themselves to unique interpretations?
I read each poem aloud several times, asking children to “listen care-
fully and think about which poem creates the most vivid mental images for
Reading with Meaning
80
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
you.” Next I say, “Take a copy of the poem youve chosen and a piece of
drawing paper, and find a place you can work well. Read the poem to your-
self a couple of times, then capture the image thats in your head as best you
can onto paper. Take about ten minutes, then we’ll share our work.”
When children gather to share, I ask those who have chosen the same
poem to sit together, share their images, and talk about what they notice.
After the small groups have shared, I ask children to tell the large group
what theyve learned. Their words may not change (“Our pictures/images
are different because our schema is different”), but the experience of this
kind of activity helps children anchor their words and give them meaning.
(Figure 6.1 shows some responses as displayed in a classroom.)
Readers create images to form unique interpretations, clarify
thinking, draw conclusions, and enhance understanding
(dramatic response)
While the concepts above are inherent in all the lessons described in this
chapter, dramatizing short pieces of text is another way to engage and teach
81
Chapter 6: Creating Mental Images
FIGURE 6.1 One class’s mental images
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
young readers about mental images, as I learned from the fish with the
puckered lips in the Night Sounds, Morning Colors experience.
I ask children to get together in groups of three or four and find a
place where there is enough space for them to work together comfortably. I
tell them, “Close your eyes and listen carefully to the poem I’m about to
read. Pay special attention to the words in the poem and your schema to
create vivid, detailed images.”
I read the poem aloud three or four times and ask children to think
aloud in their groups about the images theyve created. Next I say, “Put your
thinking together to create a dramatic interpretation of the poem. Think
about things like:
What about the poem does your group think is most important?
How will you show that?
How can everyone be included?”
Books like Martha Robinsons The Zoo at Night are good choices for
this type of dramatization and interpretation—koalas munch, spider mon-
keys frolic, the hippo floats, and the giant tortoise looks about to see that all
is right with the night. (There are some tiger cubs, but theyre peacefully
cuddling next to their sleeping mother.)
Later, I ask children to share their dramatic interpretations. I ask
each group to talk about why they chose to dramatize the poem the way
they did, focusing on how each group chose to interpret the poem in a
different way, based on their images and what they believed to be most
important.
Children also love to choose their own poems or short pieces of text to
dramatize and present to the group. Sometimes the audience tries to guess
what the poem is about; other times one or two children will read the poem
while others in the group act out their images. Later, when we learn how
readers use dramatic responses to figure out a tricky word (like pagoda) or
understand a puzzling piece of text, children will have had practice with
this type of response.
Readers’ images are influenced by the shared images of others
(artistic response)
I choose Georgia Heard’s poem “Ducks on a Winter Night” because I know
it’s a poem my children have some schema for, yet is sophisticated enough
to require thoughtful interpretation. It reads:
Reading with Meaning
82
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Ducks asleep
on the banks of the pond
tuck their bills
into feathery quills,
making their own beds
to keep warm in.
I write the poem on chart paper, and the children and I read it
together three or four times. We dont talk much about images or meaning;
I ask children to go to their seats and draw the images theyve created from
the poem independently. Next, I ask them to share their images with the
person sitting next to them and talk about not only their images, but also
the bit of text that inspired that particular image.
When they finish, I say, “Lets read the poem again. As we read, pay
attention to your images this time through. After learning about your part-
ner’s image and rereading the text, would you change the image youve
drawn in any way? Did your partners image change your understanding of
the poem? Did rereading the text change the way you picture it?” After the
children have listened to the poem again, I say, “Go to the other side of
your paper and draw your image as you see it now.”
At their tables, the children share their work. This was a great help for
Nicole. She had originally thought the quills referred to in the poem were
porcupine quills; after a conversation with her partner, Abby, she had a
much better understanding of the poem (see page 89).
Images are fluid; readers adapt them to incorporate new
information as they read (artistic response)
Up until now, most lessons I’ve described have focused on creating detailed
images in response to a poem or a short piece of text. These types of images
arent the kind that change much once theyve been created. But with Jane
Yolens book Greyling, I show children how readers’ mental images can be
fluid, that they can change to incorporate new information.
Greyling is the story of a fisherman and his wife who live in a moss-
covered hut by the sea, longing for nothing more than a child of their own.
One day the fisherman finds a small grey seal stranded on a sandbar. But
this is no regular seal. . . .
The first day, without showing children the pictures, I read aloud the
first half of the book, quickly sketching some of my most vivid images on
sticky notes and thinking aloud about how they change as I continue to
83
Chapter 6: Creating Mental Images
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
read and learn more about the story. When I finish, I place them on the
dry-erase board.
“Let’s take another look at my images,” I say. “Do you see how they
changed as I kept reading? Here I have an image of a seal in the fishermans
arms, and in this sketch my image of the seal has changed into a little boy.
As I continue to read, the images in my head continue to change, too. Do
you see?”
“Is it kind of like a movie going on inside your head?” Madison asks. I
tell her it’s exactly like that. “Tomorrow,” I tell the children, “I’ll read the
rest of the story and you’ll have a chance to see what it’s like to have a movie
going on inside your head, and do some sketching, too.”
The next day, the children bring a clipboard and a pencil to the meet-
ing area. I give them a record sheet divided into fourths and headed
Adapting mental images during reading.” I reread the first half of the book,
showing children the pictures this time through. When we get to where we
left off the day before, I say, “Now I’m going to read you the rest of the story.
I’m not going to show you the pictures right now; I want you to listen to the
words and keep track of how the images in your mind change as I continue
to read. I’ll read a while, then stop, giving you time to sketch your images.
When we finish, we’ll take a look to see how youve adapted your images to
include new information in the text. Are you ready?”
Figure 6.2 shows one childs response to this exercise.
Evoking vivid mental images helps readers create vivid images
in their writing (artistic/written response)
A wonderful consequence of teaching mental images in reading is the effect
it has on childrens writing. I learned this the day I asked children to draw
their images as they listened to a nature CD called Mountain Streams. The
peaceful sounds filled every corner of the room, and the rich details in the
childrens drawings caught me by surprise. Orange and pink sunsets, rush-
ing waterfalls, meandering streams, and black-sky thunderstorms covered
their sheets of paper.
Just as I’m about to ask children to come up front to share their
images, Kenta skips over and whispers in my ear, “My table thinks we
should write about our mental images, too. Can we? Please?” I tell him it’s a
brilliant idea and ask him to make an announcement to find out what the
rest of the class thinks. Theyre with him! (And to think I almost missed the
boat on this one. . . .)
Children who couldnt seem to get past writing about loving Mom,
Dad, brothers, sisters, grandmas, grandpas, dogs, cats, me, trips to the park,
Reading with Meaning
84
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
and birthday parties at McDonalds are now writing about cool summer
breezes, cabins off in the distance, and swooshing waterfalls splashing their
faces with tears. Shawnda writes, “The rushing wind rolls across the Rocky
Mountain heights. The stream squiggles down the mountain.” And
Mitchell, whose topic of choice usually has something to do with monsters,
writes, “The golden sun sets behind the purple mountains in flashes of pink
and red.” As more and more children share, I say, “Guys—your writing is
unbelievable today! Your images are so clear, and your words—they sound
like poetry! Do you hear what I hear?” Their beaming faces and exuberant
nods tell me they do. “So what do you think happened? What made the dif-
ference today?”
They attribute their brilliance to the peacefulness, to the beautiful
sounds that helped them get ideas, and to the images they created in their
minds. I attribute their brilliance to all those things, too, but I know theres
more to it. Theyre writing beautifully because the stage has been set for
them. Theyve been creating images in different contexts for three or four
weeks now; I’ve taught them about detail. Theyve been listening to and
reading poems and stories with beautiful language for three or four weeks,
85
Chapter 6: Creating Mental Images
FIGURE 6.2 Whitneys changing mental images for Greyling by Jane Yolen
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
too; I’ve taught them about rich words. And now theyre putting all that
learning into yet another context: writing. It’s probably no surprise we
launch into poetry during this study—or that music is now a ritual in our
writers’ workshop.
Reading with Meaning
86
Evidence of Understanding and Independence
Maggies mental image from Stuart Little by E. B. White
My Dad always says
I’m daydreaming, but
that’s not the right
word. I’m making
mental images and
connecting them
together. I’m not day-
dreaming, I tell him,
I’m thinking.”
Cory
When my Mom reads
me Harry Potter, it’s
like I have a paint set
inside my brain. And
I never run out of
paint!”
Ben
Yesterday I was ski-
ing so fast I just knew
I was in for a major
wipeout, and then I
made a mental image
of what I should do. I
could see me curving
to slow down in my
head, and then I just
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
87
Chapter 6: Creating Mental Images
did it in real life! My
feet started curving. It
really helped me!”
Andrew
One day I was telling
children how I some-
times listen to Bronco
games on the radio
when I’m driving. I
told them about how I
create images in my
mind as the announcer
describes the action on
the field and how it
makes the game a lot
more interesting and
memorable for me. At
the end of the story,
Nina raised her hand.
Mrs. Miller, there’s
just one thing I dont
get. How do you drive
with your eyes closed?”
Dear Debbie,
I started reading Whit
The Lion, the Witch,
and the Wardrobe
several nights ago
because he had gotten
a little sample of a
chapter of it from an
annotated youth ver-
sion with Carol in the
doctor’s office waiting
room. We borrowed
Thad’s paperback copy
Sheldons mental image from Little Bear by Else Holmelund Minarik
Olivias mental image from Flossie and the Fox by Patricia McKissack
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Reading with Meaning
88
Emilys mental image from Snow White and Rose Red retold by Barbara Cooney
Brendans mental image from Dogs in Space by Nancy Coffelt
and read the first
chapter, which he
seemed to soak up
well. The only illustra-
tions in the book,
however, are very
small and simple
pen-and-ink sketches
covering maybe one-
fourth of the first page
of each chapter. After
we finished the first
chapter, Whit hungrily
thumbed through the
pages until he came to
the start of each
chapter, looked at the
sketch, and asked me
to read him the name
of the chapter so he
could try and figure
out what was going to
happen in the story.
Since this was the first
chapter book with
minimal illustrations
I’d ever read to Whit,
I apologized for the
lack of illustrations
and suggested maybe
we could look in the
library for a version of
the book that had
more pictures. Whit
kind of gave a sigh,
and then said in a
slightly condescending
tone, “No, Dad. Dont
you think we can
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
89
Chapter 6: Creating Mental Images
make mental images
as we read the story?”
Thanks for the
great year Whit is
having!
Hunt Walker
Conferring is often the
best window into chil-
drens thinking. The
things they say and the
creative ways they find
to apply their learning
leave me shaking my
head and smiling in
amazement, as in the
following conferences
with Frank and
Grace, Daniel, and
Kenta.
Hey, Frank,” I say,
“h o w s Little Bear
going for you today?”
It’s great!” he
answers. “And you
know what? When I
am reading Little
Bear, I can just put
me right in the story.
I’m doing what Little
Bear is doing. When I
turn the page, it’s like
someone else is turning
the page. See right
here? When Little
Bear says, ‘I’m cold,
I’m cold, too—freezing
Coltens mental image from I Was Walking Down the Road by Sarah Barchas
Nicole shows how she changed her thinking after conferring with Abby
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Reading with Meaning
90
Abbys mental image from Ice Stars by S. A. Kramer
cold! I’m really shiver-
ing, see?”You do look
cold!” I say, as I wonder
to myself, “Those
couldnt be real goose
bumps on his arms,
could they?”
At this point Grace,
who sits across from
Frank, overhears us.
Frank, listen to this,
she says. “My mental
images are sort of like
that, but not exactly.
It’s like I’m inside the
book, like you say, but
the book characters
dont notice me. I’m
part of what’s happen-
ing, but I’m invisible.
Are you invisible, too,
or does Little Bear see
you?”
Oh he definitely
sees me, and I see him.
It’s kind of like Little
Bear and I are brothers.
When Mother Bear
made snow pants for
Little Bear, she gave
them to me, too! And
you know what else? I
can pop out of one
character and into
another if I want.
Little Bear’s image
just pulls me in, and
I’m not at school any-
more. I’m in his life.”
■■■
FIGURE 6.3 Kentas mental image from Stars and Planets edited by David Levy
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Mental Images at a Glance
Whats Key for Kids?
Proficient readers create mental images during and after reading.
These images come from all five senses and the emotions and are
anchored in the readers prior knowledge.
Proficient readers understand how creating images enhances compre-
hension.
Proficient readers use images to draw conclusions, create unique
interpretations of the text, recall details significant to the text, and
recall a text after it has been read.
91
Chapter 6: Creating Mental Images
Hi, Daniel, I say. “Tell me about what youre doing over here in the corner.” It looks to
me like he’s covering entire pages with Post-it notes, but I’m willing to listen.
I’m covering up all the pictures with Post-its because I want to make my own mental
images. These arent very good. I know that’s not what billy goats really look like, and see
this troll? Trolls only have one eye and wouldnt wear clothes like that!”
So youre saying your schema about billy goats and trolls is different from the illustra-
tor’s?” I ask him.
Daniel nods yes. “I have lots more schema for billy goats and trolls. See my images?”
I see what you mean about the one big eye, I say, “and the clothes, too. Your images
really are different!”
Oh, he says, “remember when Ben brought in that picture of Hagrid from Harry
Potter and had a big fit because Hagrid didnt look like Ben’s image? Its kind of like the
same thing!”
Kenta wildly motions to me across the room, jumping in and out of his seat. “Look at
this!” he says as he points to a picture in the book Stars and Planets edited by David Levy,
a small diagram illustrating how Earth’s seasons change. “I really get what you mean about
making mental images now! I kept looking at this picture and I didnt get it at all. But
then I saw these arrows, and I made it move in my mind! The earth is turning around the
sun, and I can see leaves for fall, and snow coming in the winter, and beautiful-smelling
flowers in spring, and the hot sun in summer, with people in shorts, all happy and stuff.
Heres my mental image of it! See how the sun hits different parts of the earth at different
times of the year?” (Figure 6.3 shows Kenta’s drawing.)
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Images from reading frequently become part of the reader’s writing.
Readers use images to immerse themselves in rich detail as they read.
The detail gives depth and dimension to the reading, engaging the
reader more deeply and making the text more memorable.
Readers adapt their images in response to the shared images of other
readers.
Readers adapt their images as they continue to read. Images are
revised to incorporate new information in the text and new interpre-
tations as developed by the reader.
Evoking mental images helps readers create images in writing.
(Adapted from Keene and PEBC)
Tried and True Texts for Mental Images
Close Your Eyes by Jean Marzollo
Color Me a Rhyme by Jane Yolen
Creatures of Earth, Sea, and Sky by Georgia Heard
Footprints and Shadows by Anne Westcott Dodd
Goodnight to Annie by Eve Merriam
Greyling by Jane Yolen
I Am the Ocean by Suzanna Marshak
Mountain Streams (compact disc)
The Napping House by Audrey Wood
Night in the Country by Cynthia Rylant
Night Sounds, Morning Colors by Rosemary Wells
Putting the World to Sleep by Shelley Moore Thomas
Quiet, Please by Eve Merriam
The Salamander Room by Anne Mazer
Say Something by Mary Stoltz
What Does the Rain Play? by Nancy White Carlstrom
When I’m Sleepy by Jane R. Howard
Wild, Wild Sunflower Child by Nancy White Carlstrom
The Zoo at Night by Martha Robinson
Reading with Meaning
92
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
93
Digging
Deeper
7
Children make
predictions based on
personal experience.
Christopher thinking his
way through Judy
Donnellys The Titanic
Lost and Found.
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
A
pples, carrots, and yogurt are back in our lunches. Holiday cookies,
cakes, and candies are thankfully long gone, along with the mugs
that sing while you sip, the very large reindeer pins with blinking
noses, and the lovely red sweatshirts with every child’s name written in glit-
ter. It’s time to get down to business.
“Can you believe its January already?” we ask each other in the halls.
“How can that be,” we wonder, “when we have so much left to teach?”
Were afraid we’ll never get to everything. And were right—we wont.
In our hearts we know we couldnt even if we tried. We stop to remind
ourselves of conversations in faculty meetings, on the stairs, and in the
parking lot. We remind ourselves that we believe in depth over breadth; we
believe that teaching a few things well makes more sense than teaching
many things superficially. And we resolve to continue to do what we believe
is best for our kids, our school, and ourselves.
So whats next? By now children know all about thinking about their
thinking. Theyre ready to learn how to engage in deeper, more thoughtful
conversations with others and respond to text in ways that increase their
capacity for understanding. Now is the time to build on what has come
before.
Over the past few months, children have come to know each other
well. They know about each others interests, special talents, and little idio-
syncrasies. They know that Adam is the dinosaur expert, Thad is fascinated
with JFK, and Paige is a standout soccer player. They’ve been outraged by
the bullies in Oliver Button Is a Sissy, sipped hot chocolate together on
Coffeehouse Poetry Day, and have had experiences working in a variety of
large and small groups. They have history.
And because they do, the time is right for increasing the sophistication
of the read-alouds, showing them how to engage in more challenging dia-
logue and making connections from our past experiences to more in-depth
learning.
Taking the Conversation Deeper
It’s one thing to share thinking and listen respectfully, and quite another to
listen actively and respond thoughtfully to others in order to understand
another’s point of view and/or inform ones own. Now is the time to teach
children the difference. It’s no longer enough for me to ask, “So what are
you thinking, Daniel? And Madison? And Frank? And Molly?” Continuing
Reading with Meaning
94
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
to elicit individual responses without focusing or connecting them does
little to extend the conversation, take it deeper, or enhance understanding.
I explain to the children that because theyve gotten so good at think-
ing out loud and listening to each other, theyre ready to learn how to listen
and learn together in new ways. “You know how readers make connections
from the books they read to their lives, other books, and the world?” I ask
them. “When readers talk together about books, they make connections
from the thinking of others to their own thinking, too. Whether its to bet-
ter understand a tricky part of text or talk about a favorite page, thoughtful
readers engage in dialogue to better understand books and each other.”
The strategies of questioning and inferring are particularly helpful in
teaching children how to take the conversation deeper. Asking children to
choose a burning question from a chart weve created together, or posing an
open-ended question myself and working with them to infer meaning is a
perfect way to get started. The question serves to focus the dialogue; show-
ing children how to collaborate to infer answers, solve problems, and con-
struct meaning comes next.
Modeling, naming what I do and what I notice the children doing, and
guiding them as needed gets us started. Children arent raising their hands
now. I want them to learn how real conversation flows; I want them to learn
how to get it going, keep it going, and take it deeper. I teach children to ask
themselves the following questions before joining a conversation:
Does what I have to say connect to the question or topic?
Can I connect what I have to say to what someone else has said?
Can I support what I have to say? What evidence or personal experi-
ence do I have to make my point?
Has someone else already said what I am about to say?
If I am speaking to disagree, can I state what I heard the other person
say and explain how and why my thinking is different in a nice way?
Does what I want to say take the conversation deeper?
Talking through a text together, working in small groups, getting eye-
to-eye and knee-to-knee, and participating in the sharing and the regularly
scheduled book clubs allow children to practice and learn the art of collab-
oration. Whether its working on an issue on the playground, problem solv-
ing in math, hypothesizing in science, or answering a question in reading,
children are up to the challenge when we show them how.
I admit it sounds a bit daunting, but year after year I’ve listened and
watched as children work and learn together in ways that exceeded my
95
Chapter 7: Digging Deeper
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
expectations. So . . . expect brilliance. Model well and model often. Pay
attention to detail. Trust yourself and your kids. You wont be disappointed!
Book Clubs for Primary Kids?
It was a speaker at a literacy conference in Denver who inspired me to
introduce book clubs to six- and seven-year-olds. She spoke about the rich
discussions that were possible for children in the intermediate grades.
“What about primary kids?” I asked her (in my head). “Just because
children arent yet fluent readers doesnt mean they cant think and talk
about books in meaningful ways.”
I knew then and there that book clubs would soon be coming to my class-
room. I’d always wondered how children would talk about books if I werent
there. Would they respond in the same ways they did in the large group?
Would they use the same language? Would they talk about their connections,
images, questions, and inferences? Maybe book clubs could help me find out.
Over the next few weeks I hatched a plan. I realized that while I still
wanted to learn more about how children were applying their learning,
more than anything else I wanted to provide a time and place for them to
engage in active, lively conversation about books and ideas—without a pre-
set agenda. Giving children ongoing opportunities to get together by them-
selves simply to enjoy books and engage in the social nature of learning
became my primary goal.
I thought about the book clubs I’d been in over the years. There were
the professional ones, where we read only work-related texts. There was the
neighborhood one, where we read best-sellers. And there was the one where
womens angst reigned supreme.
I thought about my current book club, now in its fifth year. What was
it about this one that kept us coming back? I thought it had to do with the
diversity of the group and the diversity of the kinds of books we read. The
group includes men and women, teachers and stonecutters, journalists,
accountants, businesspeople, brokers, and more. Our reading reflects our
individual and collective interests. We keep coming back because while we
mostly talk about books, we talk about other things, too. We gain new
insights, challenge old perspectives, and sometimes feel weve solved the
problems of the world. (And then theres the food. . . .)
How can I transport this same kind of spirit into the classroom? I
wondered. First, I knew that the kids needed to see and hear what I was
Reading with Meaning
96
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
talking about. They needed to see a book club like mine in action. To that
end, I recruited four parents I knew well—two moms and two dads—and
explained what I was after. With only a little arm twisting, they agreed to
model a book club with me. I gave them each a copy of Where the Wild
Things Are along with some sticky notes, and we set a date. It worked so
well that I now convene a model book club each year.
On the specified day, we sit in a circle on the floor, with the children
sitting in a bigger circle around us. We chat a bit, pass around a snack of
animal crackers, and begin talking about the book. (Dont worry—parents
never lack for words. One time they went on for thirty minutes just talking
about connections! By then the children had themselves become wild
things, and I was ready to set sail myself.)
I ask the kids to watch and listen carefully to what the adults do and
say. Afterward I write down their observations on chart paper and hang it
on the wall near where their own book clubs will meet. The children
observe the adults
working together to figure out answers to questions
taking turns talking
asking questions
laughing
rereading parts of the book
making connections from the book to our lives and other books
inferring
working together to understand
Children choose their books for the book club from those weve read
aloud and discussed previously. That way, they all can discuss books that are
sophisticated enough to warrant thoughtful conversation; knowing how to
read the book is not a requirement. Multiple copies are kept together in a
small bookshelf next to where the book clubs meet.
At first I wondered if having heard and discussed a book before might
dampen the childrens enthusiasm, but it seems to have just the opposite
effect. Their familiarity with the text seems to jump-start the conversation,
giving children the confidence they need when the focus of the talk shifts to
new issues and ideas.
I meet briefly with each group the day before their book club meets and
read the text aloud again; children follow along in individual copies. I ask
them to bring sticky notes and/or their notebooks with them to the read-
aloud so that they can prepare for the next days discussion by marking the
text or otherwise making notes.
97
Chapter 7: Digging Deeper
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Favorite books include the following:
Amazing Grace by Mary Hoffman
An Angel for Solomon Singer by Cynthia Rylant
Grandfather Twilight by Barbara Berger
How Many Days to America? by Eve Bunting
The Lotus Seed by Sherry Garland
The Magic Fish by Freya Littledale
Oliver Button Is a Sissy by Tomie dePaola
Sleeping Ugly by Jane Yolen
The Table Where Rich People Sit by Byrd Baylor
The Titanic Lost and Found by Judy Donnelly
Tut’s Mummy Lost and Found by Judy Donnelly
Wild, Wild Wolves by Joyce Milton
Williams Doll by Charlotte Zolotow
Over the years I’ve collected multiple copies of my own, but libraries can
help you acquire the copies you need.
Because I want to ensure a mix of boys, girls, interests, and reading
abilities, I group children accordingly, four or five per group. One book
club meets each week during independent reading time. This gives children
a chance to participate every five weeks or so. They meet at a low, round
table in the classroom while the rest of us read and confer. Book clubs last
anywhere from fifteen to thirty minutes. When the children finish, they
reflect aloud on how things went, choose their next book, and rejoin their
classmates in readers’ workshop.
Are children able to talk together about books and ideas independ-
ently and in meaningful ways? Do they talk about their connections,
images, questions, and inferences? Yes! And I’ve come to think I know why.
Their knowledge of the language and strategies that readers use propels
them into lively conversations as they discuss issues and ideas, gain new
insights, and challenge old perspectives. Who knows? One day they might
solve the world’s problems!
Making Thinking Visible
Once I gave up the basal reader, it took awhile to figure out what kids
should be doing instead of those neatly stapled stacks of worksheets. I
Reading with Meaning
98
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
thought that surely they needed to do something when they finished reading
a book. But what? Design book jackets? Draw a picture of their favorite
part? Make puppets of the books characters? Rewrite endings? My kids did
all these things—and loved every minute.
But my colleagues and I began to notice that while it took children ten
minutes to read a book, it could take them thirty minutes to design a book
jacket. And for what? Most likely it would wind up on a bulletin board
underneath a snappy heading. It dawned on me that these activities were
keeping children from doing what we know helps them learn to read best:
reading.
If readers’ workshop is all about real reading, it must be about
responding in real ways, too. Nowadays when children in my class respond
to their reading, the focus is on what theyre thinking and learning.
Nowadays the purpose of their response is to enhance understanding. And
those time-consuming projects? Theyve gone the way of the worksheets.
Teaching children how to use a variety of open-ended responses helps
them remember their thinking as they read, heightens their awareness of
the strategy being taught, and lets us (and them) know how well they’re able
to apply it independently. Ultimately, when that little voice in a childs head
says, “What? I dont get this!” responses that focus on thinking and learning
can help change that voice to “Oh, I get it now!”
What are the kinds of responses that focus and engage young readers,
helping them hold on to their thinking and enhance understanding? Which
ones show the children and me how theyre applying a strategy and what
theyre learning and thinking? And which ones are the most universal, able
to be used across strategies and throughout the day? Options for response
are many, but the following are those I use and teach most consistently:
Sticky notes. This is probably what kids use most. Keeping track of
your thinking on sticky notes is a lot like writing in the margins or
highlighting text in your own book. The uses of sticky notes are
almost limitless—children use them to record strategy use, draw
images, make and confirm predictions, form opinions, think their
way through a text, and on and on.
Notebook entries. I teach children to use their notebooks because of
their accessibility and versatility, both at school and at home.
Notebooks are great for both written and artistic responses. I some-
times ask children to bring their notebooks to a read-aloud to help
them keep track of their thinking, record their questions, determine
important learning and ideas, synthesize information, and so on.
99
Chapter 7: Digging Deeper
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Two-column notes. Almost as versatile as sticky notes and notebooks,
a two-column setup for notes is also open-ended and can be used in a
variety of ways. For example, one column might be headed “Quote
from text” and the other, “My thinking”; “I learned”/“I wonder”;
“Quote from text”/“My image”; and the like.
Venn diagrams. These are useful when comparing relationships
between pairs of characters, authors, types of text, strategies, and even
such specific things as meteors, comets, and asteroids.
Webs. These are useful in “putting it all out on the table” in the
process of answering questions, determining important ideas, draw-
ing inferences, and forming conclusions.
Story maps. These are useful in helping children understand how
story elements work together to create meaning.
I teach children how and when to use each response one at a time. I
take my time introducing each one, waiting for just the moment a particu-
lar approach will be the most helpful and make the most sense, when the
experience might be anchored in the childs mind. That way, when kids
encounter similar problems in their own reading, they will connect their
current situation to the earlier experience.
Teaching children a new way to respond is not unlike teaching a new
strategy. Once I’ve modeled the response, I need to provide opportunities
for children to gradually assume responsibility for its use. In addition to
asking them to work through a new response option in small groups and
pairs, I sometimes ask them to bring clipboards and pencils to the meeting
area, where they’ll practice using the response in the course of a read-aloud.
This way, their focus can be on listening to the story and using the response
rather than having to be responsible for reading the text, too. When chil-
dren experience and understand the purpose of each response, it becomes
easier for them to apply it in their own reading in purposeful ways.
When teaching children how to respond in a new way, I want them to
understand that this is now another option, or tool, they can use to help
themselves make sense of their reading; its another technique they can add
to those they already know. I want the children to understand how to use
each type of response flexibly, to adapt the responses in ways that are most
useful, and most important, to create their own ways of building under-
standing.
For example, after teaching children how to use story maps to identify
important information in fiction, I moved into showing them how to iden-
tify the key ideas, or themes, in stories. Olivia was puzzled. She brought me
Reading with Meaning
100
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
the story map form and said, “Wheres the place for the theme? I think it
should be on here somewhere.” When I asked her where, she didnt hesitate.
I incorporated her suggestion on the form that night (Figure 7.1).
Looking closely at childrens responses, conferring, listening carefully,
and taking notes about what they have to say throughout the day give me a
clear indication of where they are as learners, both independently and as a
group. I learn which children need more individual or small-group support,
and which ones are ready to move forward into more challenging or differ-
ent types of text.
Taking the Learning Deeper
It’s the last forty minutes of the day—work activity time in Room 104. As I
take a minute to stand back and reflect, I’m struck by the realization that at
this very moment, not one child is calling my name, tugging at my sleeve,
or tapping my shoulder. I take the opportunity to pick up my notebook,
find a corner, and take a closer look.
101
Chapter 7: Digging Deeper
FIGURE 7.1 Olivias suggestion for the story map form
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
I love what I see. Perched on my grandmothers small spindle rocker,
Olivia is reading aloud from Oliver Button Is a Sissy by Tomie dePaola.
Whitney, Jaron, Daniel, and Tate sit cross-legged in a semicircle below her,
their fingers following along in copies of the book as she reads. Shoulders
straight and legs crossed, Olivia stops reading and puts the book in her lap.
“Now heres what I’m wondering right now,” she says in a voice
vaguely familiar. “On this page, where the boys took Oliver Buttons shoes
and wouldnt give them back, I just keep wondering, why would they do
that? Why do you think they would do that?”
Shes drawn a questioning web on the dry-erase board and written,
“Why would they do that?” in the circle at the center. “Maybe theyre just
jealous of him,” Whitney volunteers. “Well, that could be it,” Olivia
responds, as she writes Whitney’s response on the web. “What do the rest of
you think about that?”
I’d love to know what the rest of them think about that, but Chris
catches my eye across the room. Surrounded by a stack of volcano books,
hes glued about a mile of red yarn on top of a volcano hes made from
brown construction paper, and now hes taping six long pages of writing,
end to end, to the volcanos base. Titled “Pompeii Buried Alive!” his piece
begins, “A large cloud appeared over the volcano. WOW! I can see the ashes
falling on the people and the houses in my head. That had to hurt. . . .”
In another part of the room, Sunny, Paige, Grace, Brodie, Frankie, and
Torin are preparing for their play, which was inspired by the book Heckedy
Peg by Audrey Wood. Copies of the text, along with fabric, thread, needles,
paper, staplers, scissors, markers, and glue cover the tabletop as they work
to create costumes, props, tickets, scripts, a program, and signs.
The Lego kids are busy, too. Mitchell’s building a deinonychus for his
dinosaur research (“How can deinonychus run so fast?”) and Thad’s creat-
ing a model of the Texas School Book Depository Building. Hes fascinated
with JFK and is preparing for a class he’ll be teaching this time tomorrow.
Five kids and I have signed up already, and he’s asked us in writing to bring
notebooks, pencils, and “all your questions.”
Maggie, Bret, Nina, and Madi are trying to figure out how they can
adapt their Irish step dancing moves to the tune “Rockin’ Robin,” and right
behind them Meghan, Nicole, and Caroline are working on their dog
research. They’ve stuffed their notebooks full of dog poems, pictures, notes,
and observations, real examples of dog biscuits and treats, and photographs
of dogs they know. Today, according to plan, theyve brought in samples of
hair from all those dogs they know and are sorting them into plastic bags
and labeling each bag with a permanent marker.
Reading with Meaning
102
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Whit and Frank are building “Little Bear World” out of wooden
blocks, and just outside the room a small chorus of girls and boys are
singing their way through their three-ring binders. The binders are filled
with copies of the songs weve learned so far, and the children are on the
fourth, with about twenty more to go. Cory, Madison, and Kenta gingerly
sidestep them on their way out to the playground for gravel and sand. We
read Where Are You Going, Manyoni? by Catherine Stock earlier and they’re
intent on creating Tobwani Dam in an old aquarium.
I smile as I watch them, remembering the raised eyebrows of those
who earlier in the year wondered how in the world I could find the time to
let children “just play”—and every day, too, for goodness’ sake.
Work Activity Time
In the beginning of the year, children use work activity time to investigate
and explore the materials in the classroom. I explain the options they will
have during this part of the day and trust them to make good choices.
Together, we work to create the expectations and procedures we will follow.
It’s a time for building relationships and establishing community, playing
together and making new friends, practicing being thoughtful and respect-
ful to each other, and learning the art of sharing a room and everything in
it with twenty-six other people.
And it’s the perfect time for children to synthesize and apply their
learning in new contexts, either independently or with their peers; it’s the
time when children can put into practice what theyve learned during other
parts of the day. But before we can expect the Tobwani Dams, Little Bear
Worlds, and classes on JFK, children need time to explore, investigate, and
yes, play.
They need time to build with blocks, draw, paint, cut and paste, play
with clay, make beaded necklaces, finger-knit friendship bracelets, sew, take
care of the animals, and listen to stories. They need time to read and write,
listen to music, sing and dance, play school, do experiments, work with
magnetic letters, and play board games like Sorry, checkers, and chess.
I dont worry about who goes where, for how long, or how many are
already there. There are no sign-ups, rotations, or elaborate plans for chil-
dren to fill out. I simply ask them where theyd like to go and what they’d
like to do, and remind them of what weve learned about being respectful
and thoughtful to each other and the materials in the classroom.
103
Chapter 7: Digging Deeper
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
The principles that guide my work throughout the rest of the day
guide my work here, too. Just as in readers’ and writers’ workshop, provid-
ing time, choice, a variety of materials for a wide range of responses, and a
predictable structure children can count on allows the unpredictable to
happen. If I want to challenge childrens imagination, promote their love of
learning and inquiry, and encourage them to become independent learners
and thinkers, they need to be the ones deciding where they’ll go and what
they’ll do.
And if I’m patient, one fine day someone will think to paint an image
from a poem theyve written or read, or start a dinosaur book club, or create
a cutaway of Earth out of clay. One fine day someone will ask a question
about the whereabouts of our missing frog and write a note to everyone to
help him infer where it might have gone. And one fine day someone may
choose to make a chart that synthesizes her learning about Planet X.
When that day comes, I shout it from the rooftops. I ask the child to
share his work, and when hes finished, I say, “How did you come up with
such a good idea?” I let everyone know how making connections from what
they already know to another situation or time of day is a brilliant thing to
do. And because it happens every year, I know that the share circle will soon
be filled with other kids who have plenty of brilliant ideas of their own!
Childrens talk changes from “I want to make pizzas out of clay” to “I
want to make the planets out of clay and put them in order from the sun.
And then I want to share it with the kindergartners.” Once children begin
to integrate their learning into their play, the materials are no longer an end
unto themselves; theyve become another means for creating understanding
and constructing meaning. Theyve become a means for living the learning.
Reading with Meaning
104
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
105
Inferring
8
Created during work
activity time, these
posters show how
children apply their
learning in new settings
and situations.
So what are you
inferring this is about?”
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
C
ory and Whit rush into the classroom minutes before the bell. They
scurry over to a corner, where Cory plunks down his backpack and
takes out what looks to be a cell phone. “See, Whit? Here it is. My
mom says it’s broken, but I’m inferring we can fix it!” Out of the corner of
my eye I watch them turn it over and over, furiously pushing buttons,
pulling the antennae out and pushing it back in, checking the batteries, lis-
tening for a dial tone.
To their surprise (and mine), the phone begins to make a strange
beeping sound. “See? I just knew it!” Cory says. “It just needs a little some-
thing. Go get a magnifying glass, quick!” They methodically examine every
inch (centimeter?) of the phone. But no amount of close examination ren-
ders them a dial tone. The beeping stops. “Well, Whit,” Cory says softly, “at
least we tried.”
“Cory,” Whit pleads, “we cant give up yet. Oh—wait! I know!” He
races over to the basket of two-column note forms and grabs one. “We can
infer what’s wrong with it!” he says. “Let’s put our thinking together. I’ll
draw the phone on this side, and you write our thinking over here. This is
going to be a huge infer! When we figure it out, lets show Mrs. Miller!
She’ll go crazy for this!” (They were right—see Figure 8.1.)
The children have been learning about the ways readers (and telephone
repairmen) infer for about four weeks. When I think about how far the kids
Reading with Meaning
106
FIGURE 8.1 Cory and Whit’s two-column notes on the phone
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
have come, I realize it’s because I’ve come a long way, too. I remember when
I wasnt even sure what inferring was, let alone how to go about teaching it.
I think back to the day when ten of us were scrunched into the old
book room at University Park Elementary, where PEBC staff developer
Chryse Hutchins was leading an after-school discussion on teaching infer-
ring to our first and second graders. “So whats everybody thinking?” she
asks us. We love Chryse, but the room is freezing. We think those might be
snowflakes outside the window. And we dont really feel like thinking.
Chryse knows all about wait time, but so do we. Undeterred, she asks, “So
how is inferring going in your classrooms? Who would like to share what
youve been doing?” Kristin and I exchange glances. Should we tell?
Kristin gives me a silent kick. I take the cue. I’ll tell. “Well, Chryse,
I’m confused, actually. Kristin and I have been having this ongoing discus-
sion about inferring, and weve been wondering things like, well, what does
it mean to infer? At first we thought it was about predicting, but if a child
makes a prediction and confirms it a page later, is that really an inference,
or just a simple prediction?” We think inferring is bigger than predicting,
but were not sure.
This conversation took place early in our work with Chryse, and we
were surprised to learn that she wasnt sure about the difference either. And
she was smart enough to admit it to us. As with the best staff developers,
Chryse was one of the first to engage us in conversations in which we all
participated in the learning. So what is inferring? Prediction is a piece of it,
but our hunches were right: there is more to it. Inferring, according to
Anderson and Pearson (1984) is the heart of meaning construction for
learners of all ages. What follows are some key considerations and anchor
lessons on inferring that put theory into practice. When readers infer, they
use their prior knowledge and textual clues to draw conclusions and form
unique interpretations of text.
Anchor Lessons
Readers determine meanings of unknown words by using their
schema, paying attention to textual and picture clues, rereading,
and engaging in conversations with others
A book like Where Are You Going, Manyoni? by Catherine Stock is perfect
for teaching children about inferring at the word level. Set on the Limpopo
River in a dry, sparsely settled area in Zimbabwe, it’s the story of a little girl
107
Chapter 8: Inferring
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
who passes through the veld on her way to school. Along the way, she skips
past shady kloofs, red sandstone koppies, acacia and baobab trees, foraging
bushpigs, and malala palms, all of which offer opportunities for authentic
modeling of how to infer meanings of unknown words.
On the first day, I read aloud the first few pages, thinking aloud about
the meanings of words like baobab, Limpopo, and bushpig. On the page with
the baobab tree, I say, “Hmmm. Baobab tree? What kind of tree is that? I
think I’ve heard the word baobab, but I’m pretty sure I’ve never seen a tree
by that name. I’m going to reread this page. Lets see, it talks about the
great, grey baobab tree. I think great means big in this sentence. When I look
at the picture, theres a huge tree that is greyish. See this one? I’m inferring
that it is the baobab tree.”
After modeling several other words in much the same way, I say,
“Think a minute about what you just saw and heard me doing to infer the
meanings of words I didnt understand. What did you notice?” Children
noticed I was
rereading
paying attention to the words
looking closely at the pictures
using my schema
taking my time
thinking really hard
“Good noticing!” I tell them. “Now its your turn. Listen carefully as I
read, and if you hear a word you dont understand, raise your hand and we’ll
work together to infer its meaning.” I read about halfway through the book,
and along the way we infer the meaning of forages, pan, and kloof. We record
our thinking on a chart entitled “What can you do to help yourself figure
out the meaning of an unknown word?” The chart is divided into three sec-
tions, headed “Word,” “What we infer it means,” and “What helped us?”
The next day we talk about what we remember and what we learned
from our work the day before. I reread the book, and when we get to the
part where we left off, I again ask children to raise their hands if they hear a
word they dont understand, adding that days words and our thinking to
the chart. At the end of the book we find a glossary of unfamiliar words and
their meanings, which gives us an opportunity to confirm or correct some
of our definitions on the chart. We decide to mark each with either a C
when our thinking is confirmed, or a C with an X on top when our defini-
tion is contradicted by the books glossary.
Reading with Meaning
108
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
When we finish, I ask the children what theyve learned, and I record their
thinking on the chart (see Figure 8.2). Before I send them off to readers
workshop I say, “In your reading today, if you come across a word and you
dont understand what it means, think about what weve learned and give it
a try. Happy reading!”
Postscript: Check out the sticky notes shown in Figure 8.3. A group of
kids at one table came up with the sticky note format, and after they shared
it with the rest of the class that day, it caught on. Thereafter, children
brought their books and sticky notes to share. This allowed us to talk about
the meaning of the unknown words together, which gave several children at
once a chance to learn new words, and gave me an opportunity to clear up
any misconceptions.
Readers make predictions about text and confirm or contradict
their predictions as they read on
Books with opportunities for making clear-cut predictions that can be con-
firmed or contradicted in the text are useful for teaching children about
109
Chapter 8: Inferring
FIGURE 8.2 Inferring
meanings of words from
Where Are You Going,
Manyoni? by Catherine Stock
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
prediction. One such book is The Royal Bee by Frances and Ginger Park,
the story of a young boy in Korea named Song-ho, who wants desperately
to learn how to read and write. But only the privileged yangban children are
allowed to go to school, and Song-ho is very poor. . . .
I read aloud the first few pages, stopping to infer meanings for such
unknown terms as yangban, sangmin, and Royal Bee, and giving children a bit
of background knowledge about the culture of Korea at the time of the story.
When we pick up the story again, Song-ho hears the ringing of the school
bell off in the distance and follows its sweet sound deep into the valley.
Once there, he looks through the rice-paper doors of the Sodang
School and sees the shadows of the yangban pupils and their master. When
Master Min slides open the door, Song-ho asks if he can be his pupil. The
master admires Song-hos bravery, but he knows that “rules are rules, and
sangmins were not allowed to attend the Sodang School.” With a lump in
his throat, he tells Song-ho to go home.
I put the book down. “So what are you thinking? What do you predict
will happen next?” Grant raises his hand. “I predict Song-ho is going to get
into that school, and hes going to learn to read and write poetry.”
Reading with Meaning
110
FIGURE 8.3 Sticky notes to share
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
I record his prediction on a two-column chart entitled “Our predic-
tions—and the thinking behind them” and ask, “What’s the thinking
behind your prediction, Grant? What made you predict that Song-ho will
get to go to the Sodang School, even though Master Min tells him to go
home?”
“Well, you know how the star of the book always gets the really good
stuff? That’s why I think he’ll get to go.”
“That’s smart, Grant. Youre using your schema for stories like this one
to predict what might happen.
“Does anybody have a different prediction?” I ask, hoping to see at
least one raised hand. But its not to be. This day everyone predicts that
Song-ho is going to the Sodang School, and he’s going to learn to read and
write!
“Let’s go back into the text,” I say. “Listen as I reread and see if you
hear anything else that might have helped you predict hed get to go to
school and learn to read and write.” I add the childrens thinking and mine
to the chart, right under Grants. As we read on, the children confirm their
prediction when Master Min says, “Welcome to the Sodang School, Song-
ho.” I put a C for “confirmed” under their prediction.
The second day I read the rest of the story. Just as we predicted, Song-
ho learns to read and write. We learn about the Royal Bee, a contest of
knowledge held every spring in the Great Hall at the governors palace.
Only one pupil will be chosen to represent the Sodang School.
I close the book and give children the two-column note form, asking
them to predict who will go to the Royal Bee on one side and to record the
thinking behind their prediction on the other. (An example of their
responses is shown in Figure 8.4.) We share, and then I read the rest of the
story aloud. Guess who gets a big cheer when I finish the story? Could it be
Song-ho?
Readers use their prior knowledge and textual clues to draw
conclusions and form unique interpretations of text
Once I saw the glee on the faces of those “fish” flailing around the meeting
area (see Chapter 6), I knew I needed to provide children regular opportu-
nities for dramatic expression. But it was Franks question about the pagoda
that kept me thinking. With practice, could dramatic responses really help
kids draw conclusions and form unique interpretations of text? Could act-
ing out a tricky word or a puzzling piece of text really serve as a means to
understanding? Could one child’s images build or strengthen the images of
another, thereby enhancing their learning?
111
Chapter 8: Inferring
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Frank and the pagoda experience showed me that these activities
could help kids—but I had to figure out how I could involve everyone in a
manageable way. Again I took up Georgia Heard’s book of poems,
Creatures of the Earth, Sea, and Sky. The poems are short, I know children
have at least some schema for most entries, and the content is just difficult
enough for children to have to think through the poem carefully to under-
stand it.
I choose six poems I think lend themselves best to dramatic interpre-
tation and copy them onto chart paper. The children and I read each of
them aloud several times. Then I say, “Think carefully about the poems we
just read. Which one of them is most interesting to you? Which one makes
you think, ‘Hmmm, what is this poem really about?’ Choose one youd like
to understand better.
“Once youve decided, go to the poem you want to learn more about.
Take it with you and find a place in the room you can work well. You have
about fifteen minutes to build on each other’s ideas and figure out how
your group can best interpret the poem youve chosen. Good luck!”
I observe Mitchell, Geoffrey, and Allan. They’ve chosen the poem
“Dressing Like a Snake”:
Reading with Meaning
112
FIGURE 8.4 Zachs prediction about Song-ho
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
A snake changes its clothes
only twice a year.
Beginning with its nose,
peeling down to its toes:
new clothes suddenly appear.
Wouldnt it be nice
to dress only twice
instead of each day of the year?
“What will they do with this one?” I wonder. “Do they get the fact
that it’s about a snake shedding its skin? What conclusions will they draw?
And how in the world will they create an interpretation that mirrors those
conclusions?”
I tell myself to stay out of it, and once again, it’s a wise decision. Figure
8.5 shows the three boys acting out the snakes shedding its skin.
Children love to use a two-column format to help them organize their
thinking as they practice inferring (see Figure 8.6). They mark up the text,
record their thinking as it evolves, and in the end come up with what they
think the poem or text is about.
Postscript: Children saw these exercises as riddles, and spontaneously
began writing their own during writers’ workshop. We decided to write a
poem together and send it home to see if their parents could figure out
what we were describing. This was such a hit that I began to post the
113
Chapter 8: Inferring
FIGURE 8.5 Mitchell, Geoffrey, and Allan “Dressing Like a Snake
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
childrens riddles out in the hall, with spaces for passersby to write in what
they inferred the poems were about. After a week or so, children wrote in
the titles of their poems, giving those same passersby a chance to confirm or
change their thinking.
Readers know to infer when the answers to their questions are
not explicitly stated in the text
How Many Days to America? by Eve Bunting is the story of a family forced by
soldiers to flee the village they love. They board a small fishing boat in the
middle of the night, taking with them only a change of clothing and some
jewelry to buy their way to America. The trip is a dangerous one; the motors of
the little boat stop, the passengers run out of food and water, and thieves come
aboard, demanding money and jewels. Will they ever reach America safely?
Reading with Meaning
114
FIGURE 8.6 Using a two-column format for inferring
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
I choose a book like this one because I know the story will provoke
lots of questions, most of them requiring readers to infer answers by using
clues in the text and their prior knowledge. I know, too, that because the
content is difficult, there will be opportunities for teaching children to
actively listen and learn from each other.
I begin by reading aloud and modeling my questions. Three or four
pages in, I invite children to share their questions; I add them to mine in
my notebook. By the end of the story, weve asked many questions:
Why did the soldiers make them leave?
Why did she have to give him her wedding ring? And garnets?
Why are the soldiers shooting at them instead of helping?
Did they go to our America? We dont have trees like that.
Where are they from?
Why did the thieves steal from them? They were so nice.
Will they ever get to America?
Did they get to go back to their village?
After school I write the questions on a chart, and we take a couple of
days to go back into the text to work together to figure out the answers. I
think aloud about how I’m using my schema, the pictures, and the words in
the text to help me infer answers; gradually I invite children to do the same,
recording our thinking on the chart. Focusing on one question at a time
allows me to show children how to extend dialogue by building on the con-
versation of others.
Readers create interpretations to enrich and deepen their
experience in a text
Have you ever read a book that changed the way you thought or felt about
something? Have you ever read a book that made you feel you were a better
person for having read it? Maybe you learned something about yourself that
you never knew before, looked at an issue from another point of view, or
changed your thinking about something you once believed to be true.
Growing up in the small town of Lamar, Colorado, I would some-
times explore with my family the crumbling ruins of nearby Camp
Amache, a Japanese internment camp set in the sand and sage of southeast-
ern Colorado. Sitting under the lone cottonwood tree, I’d listen to stories of
how this land once held hundreds of Japanese Americans against their will
during World War II. I learned that the fear they might in some way con-
tribute to the Japanese war effort was the sole reason for their confinement.
115
Chapter 8: Inferring
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
“This happened in America?” I wondered. I couldnt believe it. But when I
read James Bradleys Flags of Our Fathers, I gained a new perspective.
Though the story was still hard to believe, I was at least able to understand
the motivation and fears of those who believed that confinement of these
U.S. citizens was necessary.
Books like Miss Maggie by Cynthia Rylant, Something Beautiful by
Sharon Dennis Wyeth, If You Listen by Charlotte Zolotow, Oliver Button Is
a Sissy by Tomie dePaola, and Fireflies by Julie Brinkloe, whose characters
experience the ups and downs of childhood, might help children gain new
perspectives. Miss Maggie is a story about Maggie Ziegler, an elderly eccen-
tric who lives by herself in a rotting old house out in the middle of
nowhere, and Nat Crawford, a little boy who learns to follow his heart
when Miss Maggie needs him most.
Before I begin reading, I talk to children about how authors often
want their readers to take something away from their book, that they want
to leave their readers with something to think about and remember.
“Books,” I tell them, “can help you think about important things in new
ways. As I read Miss Maggie, be thinking about what Cynthia Rylant might
want you to think about and remember.” Devons written response to this
book is shown in Figure 8.7.
Reading with Meaning
116
FIGURE 8.7 Devons
written response to Miss
Maggie by Cynthia Rylant
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
117
Chapter 8: Inferring
Evidence of Understanding and Independence
Inferring is thinking
in your head to help
you understand, when
the story doesnt let you
in on it.”
Colin
When we infer
together, it’s like a
wire that connects
from my head to
someone elses head, on
and on and on, all
around the circle.
Riley
Inferring is some-
thing I always keep
with me—wherever I
go, it follows me
around. I carry it
with me to figure out
things in my life.”
Frank
You know when you
wonder why? If the
book doesnt tell you,
you can use your
schema and the clues
in the text to help you.
That’s inferring.”
Nina
Inferring about a missing frog
Zachary’s prediction in Timothy Goes to School by Rosemary Wells
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Reading with Meaning
118
Inferring is thinking
about what’s going to
happen in the future.”
Madison
I’m thinking
inferring is the biggest
strategy so far, ’cause
you see it’s about using
your schema and
making connections
and even mental
images, too, and
putting them all
together to figure out
what is happening.”
Justin
I’m inferring my dog
is really good at it, like
last night when I went
to get his leash, he ran
to the door! He was
inferring I was going
to take him for a
walk. And whenever
he hears the garage
door opening, he starts
jumping all around
because he’s inferring
my dad’s home.
Camille
Zachs thinking after reading Dibble and Dabble by Dave and Julie Saunders
Maxs “How Life Was Born
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
119
Chapter 8: Inferring
Nina makes connections from her life to the text to enhance understanding
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Reading with Meaning
120
Abby and Emilys inference in Peach and Blue by Sarah Kilborne
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Inferring at a Glance
Whats Key for Kids?
Readers determine meanings of unknown words by using their
schema, paying attention to textual and picture clues, rereading, and
engaging in conversations with others.
Readers make predictions about text and confirm or contradict their
predictions as they read on.
Readers use their prior knowledge and textual clues to draw conclu-
sions and form unique interpretations of text.
Readers know to infer when the answers to their questions are not
explicitly stated in the text.
Readers create interpretations to enrich and deepen their experience
in a text.
(Adapted from Keene and PEBC)
Tried and True Texts for Inferring
Creatures of Earth, Sea, and Sky by Georgia Heard
Fireflies by Julie Brinkloe
Fly Away Home by Eve Bunting
For the Good of the Earth and Sun by Georgia Heard
Grandfather Twilight by Barbara Berger
How Many Days to America? by Eve Bunting
If You Listen by Charlotte Zolotow
Miss Maggie by Cynthia Rylant
Mother Earth, Father Sky selected by Jane Yolen
Oliver Button Is a Sissy by Tomie dePaola
The Royal Bee by Frances Park and Ginger Park
Something Beautiful by Sharon Dennis Wyeth
Where Are You Going, Manyoni? by Catherine Stock
Winter Fox by Catherine Stock
121
Chapter 8: Inferring
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
This page intentionally left blank
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
123
Asking
Questions
9
Questioning webs help
children activate and
organize their thinking
and learning in order
to answer a specific
question.
Ben and his Wonder Box.
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Y
ikes! This is one weird book,” I think as I read The Stranger by Chris
Van Allsburg late one night. “What’s it about?” I wonder, and
“What’s the deal with the guy?”
“How many times are you going to read that?” my husband asks,
sleepily rolling over and pulling a pillow over his head. “Come on,” I say. “I
know its late, but just listen to a little of it—theres this one part I want to
talk with you about.” I take his silence to mean “I’d love to listen and share
my thinking with you,” so I begin reading aloud. When I finish, I realize he
hasnt heard a word.
“Mesmerized” would be how I’d describe the children as they listened
to the story the next day. (At least they know a good story when they hear
one.) And the questions! “Who is the stranger?” many wondered as they sat
eye-to-eye and knee-to-knee. “Do you think he’s part of nature? Is he
magic? Why would Farmer Bailey let a stranger into his house? How could
the thermometer break like that?” Their questions seemed endless.
In the midst of the hubbub, Grace plopped herself into my lap and
asked, “Mrs. Miller, what are you wondering?”
“Well, you know the part where the stranger is dressed in his old clothes
and hes getting ready to leave? I’m wondering what made him decide to go.”
“I know why!” she says, opening the book to the page where the
stranger is holding the red leaf. “He had to go because he got his memory
back. See the red leaf? Remember how it was green? When he blew on it
and it turned red, he got his memory back. See his face? The red leaf made
him remember who he was.”
“How had I missed that?” I wondered. “And how had Grace figured it
out so quickly?” I’d always told children that our class is a community of
learners and that I had so much to learn from them, but did I really believe
it? I was good at listening to children in order to inform my teaching, but
did I ever really consider that a child, and an emergent reader at that, could
help me understand a picture book?
I dont think so. Grace taught me I dont have to know all the answers
to teach well. Understanding that I can be both teacher and learner has
broadened my definition of my role in the classroom and increased my
capacity to teach and learn.
It used to be that the books I deemed weird, or the ones that kept me
a little off balance, remained on the shelves of libraries and bookstores. But
now theyre on my shelves, too. They’ve become the vehicle that propels my
teaching (and learning) forward.
I learned that as my questions became less literal and more sophisti-
cated, so did the childrens; as I began to think more deeply about my read-
Reading with Meaning
124
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
ing and learning, so did they; and as I began to ask questions that truly mat-
tered to me, they did, too.
Coincidence? Not a chance. The connection is absolute. The children
I teach are limited only when I choose to limit myself. And that hardback
copy of The Stranger propped up on the ledge behind my desk? Call it a
reminder.
Anchor Lessons
Readers purposefully and spontaneously ask questions before,
during, and after reading
Grandfather Twilight is one of my favorite books for teaching children
about asking questions. Beautifully written and illustrated by Barbara
Berger, it’s the story of Grandfather Twilight and how he puts the world to
sleep night after night.
Before reading the book, I explain to the children that thoughtful
readers ask questions not only as they read, but also before and after read-
ing. “Like right now,” I say, “I’m thinking some of you might have a ques-
tion or two in your head about this book, Grandfather Twilight. Is that true?
You all do? I really love what great thinkers you are. . . .”
I record our questions, and the children help me code them as we go,
putting a B for questions we asked before we read, a D for those we asked
during reading, and an A for those we asked after reading the book.
At the end of the read-aloud, our chart looks like this:
We are learning that readers ask questions before, during, and
after reading. As we read Grandfather Twilight, we wondered:
B What is twilight?
B Is that Grandfather Twilight on the cover?
B I wonder if he’s magic.
D What does among mean?
D Is this about God?
D How could the strands of pearls be endless?
D How does the pearl get bigger and bigger?
A Why would this author write a book about stuff she doesnt
understand?
A Could this be true?
125
Chapter 9: Asking Questions
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Children notice right away that wed asked questions before, during,
and after reading, but I’m after more. “Heres something else I want you to
think about,” I say. “Why do you think readers ask questions before, during,
and after reading? How does asking questions help you become a better
reader?” Then I wait. And wait. And wait.
Finally, Madison raises her hand. “I’m thinking it keeps your head in
the book. You dont want to stop reading because when you ask questions,
you want to find out about them and you just cant stop. It keeps your mind
awake.”
Postscript: To keep track of the childrens thinking and learning
throughout this study, I begin a chart entitled “Thinking about
Questioning.” I divide the chart into thirds, with these headings:
What do we know about asking questions?
How does asking questions help the reader?
How do readers figure out the answers to their questions?
We add to our knowledge during subsequent lessons when I ask,
“What did we learn about asking questions today? What new learning
could we add to our chart?” Asking children questions like these gives them
opportunities to process their learning and gives me a chance to mention
what I notice, too. We record our new learning on sticky notes and place
them under the appropriate category (see Figure 9.1).
Readers ask questions for many reasons
Readers ask questions to
clarify meaning.
speculate about text yet to be read.
determine an author’s style, intent, content, or format.
focus attention on specific components of the text.
locate a specific answer in the text or consider rhetorical questions
inspired in the text.
Because its difficult to predict the kinds of questions children might
ask, and it seems at odds with good teaching to limit their questions to a
certain kind or category, I dont go down this list and focus on the reasons
readers ask questions one by one. But I do want children to understand that
readers ask different kinds of questions for a variety of purposes. How do I
go about it?
Reading with Meaning
126
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Throughout our study of questioning, I pay attention to the kinds of ques-
tions the children and I ask, pointing out their specific purposes in the
moment. We make note of them and add our findings to the chart, right
under “How does asking questions help the reader?”
For example, when Meghan says, “I wonder if this book by Jonathan
London is going to be like the other Froggy books,” I point out that
Meghan is asking a question to determine the story’s content; shes wonder-
ing if her book will be like the others shes read by this author. Or when
Maddy asks, “What does ‘it is the flower of hope’ mean?” I point out that
smart readers also ask questions when the meaning of the text is unclear.
Readers determine whether the answers to their questions can be
found in the text or whether they will need to infer the answer
from the text, their background knowledge, and/or an outside
source
The Lotus Seed by Sherry Garland is the story of a Vietnamese family forced
to flee their homeland when a devastating civil war breaks out in their
127
Chapter 9: Asking Questions
FIGURE 9.1 The
Thinking about
Questioning” chart
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
country. With soldiers clamoring at their door, they’re allowed only a few
possessions before scrambling onto a crowded boat and setting sail in
stormy seas for America.
Sound familiar? I knew the children, too, would make connections
from Eve Buntings How Many Days to America? to The Lotus Seed. And I
knew theyd have many questions about the content of the story, which
would give me a chance to demonstrate that while some answers would
require us to infer or consult an outside source, others could be found right
in the text.
I record the childrens questions before, during, and after reading.
Over the next several days we work through them, rereading the text (its
short) and thinking aloud about how we answered many of them. Coding
answers with a T for those found in the text, an I for those we needed to
infer, and an OS for those requiring an outside source helps make the
process visible and increases childrens awareness of how and why readers
use a variety of strategies to find answers to their questions.
I’m in no hurry for us to get through the questions, nor is recording
the answers my primary goal. I want to show kids that thoughtful readers,
readers like themselves, not only take the time to ask questions, but also are
compelled to seek the answers, even (especially?) when it takes a bit of
doing.
At the end of the third day, our chart looks like this:
We are learning that readers figure out the answers to their ques-
tions by rereading and looking for clues in the text (T), inferring
(I), and/or using an outside source (OS). When we read The
Lotus Seed, we asked these questions and coded how we figured
out their answers.
Where does this take place? T
What’s a lotus seed? OS (Hollis brought one in!)
What is a dragon throne? T (authors note)
Who stole it? How did he lose it? T (author’s note)
What’s an altar? T (picture in text)
Why did her parents choose her husband for her? OS (Mrs. Miller’s
schema)
Why did he march off to war? Did he die? I
Why did she take the lotus seed, but not her mother-of-pearl hair
comb? I
What does scrambled mean? OS (Brendan)
Reading with Meaning
128
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
What will happen to them? T
Whos throwing the bombs? What war is this? T/OS (authors note
and Mrs. Miller)
Where are they going? T
What city is this? I
Why did they all live together? I
Who is Ba’? Why did she cry and cry? I
What does “it is the flower of hope” mean? I
Why doesnt the author give us more information? I
Where is Vietnam? OS (globe, pull-down map)
Postscript: One would think that after three days of delving into a
book, children would be ready to move on. Most are, but there are
always some who cant seem to get enough of one book or another. Four
days later, Hollis, Tate, Olivia, and Emily were still poring over The Lotus
Seed.
They fashioned a response sheet by connecting five pieces of 12-by-
18-inch construction paper lengthwise with tape; then they covered it
with sticky notes that recorded their thinking. Entitled “Our Thinking
about The Lotus Seed,” the sheet bears evidence that these four are using
strategies flexibly—they are on their way to learning how readers pur-
posefully use a variety of strategies when they need them to construct
meaning.
They had asked questions, such as
Why did her parents get to choose her husband? We still dont get
that.
Why didnt the little boy just ask to see the lotus seed?
Why did he hide it?
When Mrs. Miller was reading us The Lotus Seed, we didnt know
what the River of Perfumes meant, and we still dont.
Who is the new emperor?
Where did they go in America?
How many kids did she have?
They had created mental images, drawing pictures of
the lotus flower
red bombs exploding everywhere
an ao dai
129
Chapter 9: Asking Questions
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
grandmother shouting (her mouth one big circle) when she couldnt
find the lotus seed
an altar
They had drawn inferences, such as
We are inferring she ended up in New York because of all the tall
buildings and the twinkling blinking lights.
Were thinking she has two or four other kids because in the picture
there might be some in front of her and some in the back of her
holding onto her hands.
They had made connections, such as
When I feel lonely or sad, I cuddle up with my blanket or pillow, and
then I feel safe.
These soldiers are just like the ones in How Many Days to America?
They gave opinions, such as
We dont ever want our parents to pick our husbands!
We think The Lotus Seed is the best book weve ever read!
Readers understand that many of the most intriguing questions
are not answered explicitly in the text, but are left to the reader’s
interpretation
All I See by Cynthia Rylant is the story of a man named Gregory, who
spends his days painting whales. He paints them by the side of a beautiful
lake, sometimes whistling a theme from Beethovens Fifth Symphony, his
cat curled up at his feet. When he tires, he lies flat in his canoe and drifts
down the lake, smiling up at the sky. A little boy named Charlie watches
him from a distance, and the two become great friends.
Experience tells me that the answers to childrens questions about
stories like this one are not likely to be found in the text. Nor will they be
easy to infer. We’ll never know for sure why whales are all Gregory sees, if
this is his “real job,” or what Charlie’s passion will be. But thoughtful
readers dont just shake their heads in confusion and keep on reading.
Thoughtful readers know how intriguing it is to take the time to specu-
late about these kinds of questions and create their own unique explana-
tions, or interpretations.
Reading with Meaning
130
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
“Remember when we created dramatic interpretations of poems?” I
ask. “Interpreting answers to questions that are hard to figure out is a lot
like that. Readers create their own unique interpretations by using their
schema, creating mental images, and talking with others to figure out what
makes the most sense to them.
“Let’s choose a question from our list,” I continue, “one that we really
want to figure out, and think out loud about how we might make sense of it.”
I’ve made a questioning web—a circle with lines fanning out from all
sides—and I write the question the children choose (“Why are whales all he
sees?”) inside the circle. I record their interpretations on the lines around it.
They think that maybe . . .
He doesnt want to forget about whales, and he doesnt want the rest
of the world to either.
He has so much schema about whales, he just has to let some of it out.
Hes like a machine full of mental images, and they are all of whales.
Hes passionate about whales.
The music is an invisible net for mental images—it traps them and
helps him see whales.
If you care about something a lot, you see it everywhere!
He knows the blue whale is endangered—maybe he wants other
people to know it, too, so somebody can do something.
Hes an illustrator for books about whales. Maybe hes friends with
Seymour Simon.
When we finish, we talk about all the different ways weve come to
think about, or interpret, the question. Sometimes we consider all our dif-
ferent ways of thinking to create a class interpretation; other times we focus
on a single one.
Questioning webs are also useful with poetry and nonfiction text (our
web in response to Monarch Butterfly by Gail Gibbons is shown at the start
of this chapter). Children use questioning webs independently, too. For
example, Matthews response to his question “Why is Amelia Bedelia so
weird?” is shown in Figure 9.2.
Readers understand that hearing others’ questions inspires new
ones of their own; likewise, listening to others’ answers can also
inspire new thinking
What do you do when you have questions in your reading that you just
cant figure out? I usually talk with somebody whos read the book (though
131
Chapter 9: Asking Questions
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
that usually results in even more questions!), or I try to force my best friend
to listen to me read aloud at 11:30 .. (with limited results).
In the classroom, inviting children to choose a question that is partic-
ularly puzzling and get together with a few others who are likewise
intrigued provides opportunities for children to think and learn together.
This type of activity promotes the social nature of learning in authentic
ways and permits children to gain control of a strategy with the support of
their peers.
As I listen in on the conversations, sometimes their thinking seems off
the mark, and sometimes I think theyre right on. But what I believe to be
true isnt important at that point; it’s the process of children working
together to actively construct meaning for themselves that is key. Reminding
myself that there usually isnt just one right answer keeps me from trying to
influence the childrens thinking. My advice? Resist the temptation to jump
in and lead the kids to what you believe—you may be surprised at what you
learn!
I’ve chosen Cynthia Rylant’s An Angel for Solomon Singer, the story of
a lonely man who lives in a hotel for men in New York City. Solomon
Singer wanders the city streets, longing for his boyhood home in Indiana
Reading with Meaning
132
FIGURE 9.2 Matthews questioning web for Amelia Bedelia Goes Camping by Peggy Parish
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
and dreaming of the things he loves: fireplaces, purple walls, porch swings,
and balconies. One night he happens into the Westway Café, a place
known for making dreams come true. A friendly waiter named Angel tells
him to come back, and night after night he does. Soon Solomon Singer’s
life begins to change. . . .
Children wonder:
Will there really be an angel in this story?
Why doesnt Solomon Singer move back with his parents in Indiana?
How could Indiana be mixed into his blood?
Why doesnt he come to Colorado? We have hotels here with bal-
conies and purple walls.
Why does he keep coming back to the Westway Café?
Is the waiter really an angel?
Did his dreams come true?
We talk about the questions a bit, and I ask the children to think
about which ones seem the most intriguing: “Which one would you most
like to talk about with someone else?” I record their choices.
“Listen again to the story,” I say to them the next day, “and when I
finish, get together with the children who are interested in discussing the
same question as you are. I’ve written the questions and the names of the
children who have chosen them on construction paper envelopes like this
one. The paper inside is for you to record your thinking and anything
new you wonder about. Be ready to share your work in about twenty
minutes.”
Sometimes I ask the children to record their answers first, share them
with their group, then record their thinking again, noting how or whether
their answers have changed, and why. I also encourage children who are
reading the same book independently to get together in small groups to
share their questions and ideas.
■■■
I design lessons like the one that follows to provide one last scaffold before
I ask children to apply a strategy independently. The lesson also helps me
assess which children may need extra support in small-group work and/or
individual conferences.
I choose Amelia’s Road by Linda Altman because I know that while
children will identify with Amelia, her parents, and her teacher, they’ll also
133
Chapter 9: Asking Questions
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
have questions about migrant farmworkers, labor camps, and why a little
girl cries every time her father takes out a road map.
I’ve prepared a chart and a record sheet for children that are almost
identical. Over the span of two or three days, everything we do together in
the large group I ask children to do in their own reading as well. For
example, on the first day, we
read the story aloud.
record our questions on sticky notes.
place them on the chart.
choose a burning question we want to focus on the next day.
After the lesson, children do the same things—they
read independently.
record their questions on sticky notes.
place them on their record sheets.
choose a burning question each wants to focus on the next day.
The next day we reread the story, focusing on our burning question.
We work together to answer the question and spend time reflecting on what
helped us most. The children then respond in writing to their individual
questions during independent reading time and reflect on what helped them
most. (See the class chart of Amerlias Road and Cory’s corresponding
response to Tut’s Mummy Lost and Found at the start of Chapter 1.)
Readers understand that the process of questioning is used in
other areas of their lives, both personal and academic
Ben is balanced in the crook of a tree (as shown at the beginning of this
chapter). Emily has a magnifying glass and is looking closely at a ladybug.
Val’s examining a leaf with curious lumpy growths, and Ninas on her
back, hands behind her head, looking up at the sky. Ben, Madi, Val,
Nina, and their twenty-three classmates are scattered across the school’s
front lawn, wandering, wondering, and exploring the world around
them.
Each has a Wonder Box—a 3-by-5-inch file box they’ve decorated
with small stick-on ladybugs, dinosaurs, birds, and flowers and filled with a
stack of brightly colored index cards—“Wonder Cards”—on which to
record their questions.
Reading with Meaning
134
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
I’ve just read The Wise Woman and Her Secret by Eve Merriam, the
story of a wise woman who knows the secret of wisdom and a little girl
named Jenny, who learns that she knows the secret, too.
As the children wander, they record questions on their Wonder Cards:
How does a bird learn to sing?
Why do ladybugs have spots?
Are we right now out in space?
How does an ant find its way home?
How was the world born?
Why do trees have bark?
Why do dogs have wet noses?
Why do some leaves have lumps?
Who made God?
Why is the sky blue?
Why do bees sting?
Did dinosaurs ever walk on our playground?
How can it be so cold in springtime? (This ones easy: We live in
Denver!)
Ever since the day the wise woman and her secret entered the chil-
drens lives, Wonder Boxes have been spotted in the lunchroom, on the
playground, at home, and on field trips. Magnifying glasses have found
their way into them, as well as shiny pebbles, feathers, dead bugs, “dia-
monds,” flower petals, and “dinosaur fossils.”
And I have begun to do some wondering of my own. Since when have
I looked closely at a bustling anthill and wondered what goes on under-
neath? Since when have I taken the time to pick up a roly-poly and watch it
curl into a little ball? And since when have I tried to catch snowflakes in my
coat sleeve, just to see if I’d be the first to find two the same?
Children everywhere know that the secret of wisdom is to be curious
about the world, to open up their senses and see, hear, taste, touch, and
smell lifes treasures. Giving children time to explore their world, ask ques-
tions, and pursue those questions that matter to them most lets them know
I value their curiosity outside the classroom as well as inside. My job is to
continue to nurture their wonder and work to awaken my own.
135
Chapter 9: Asking Questions
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Reading with Meaning
136
Evidence of Understanding and Independence
When you have lots
of questions about a
book, that’s good.
Then you know there’s
going to be a lot of
learning coming to
you.
Daniel
I think that some-
times kids can learn
stuff that grown-ups
cant. A kid’s brain
isnt as stuffed with
things they have to do,
so they have more
room to think and see
and ask questions
about things they dont
already know the
answers to.”
Lilli
When you ask
questions, it makes
you want to keep
reading so you can
figure them out. It
keeps your head in the
book.”
Madison
Hayden creates a questioning web at home to help him understand a photograph in
the newspaper
Madisons question about Catwings by Ursula LeGuin
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
137
Chapter 9: Asking Questions
Asking questions is
smart. It means you
dont understand
something and you
know you dont
understand it.”
Bret
Sometimes you never
get the answer to your
really strong questions,
but you should still
keep working to figure
them out, because the
answer can come to
you another day.
Whit
A group exploration
Daniel’s quotation about Strega Nona by Tomie dePaola
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Reading with Meaning
138
Chriss questions before, during, and after reading The Taileypo by Paul Galdone
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
139
Chapter 9: Asking Questions
Bret’s response to The Magic Fish by Freya Littledale
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Asking Questions at a Glance
Whats Key for Kids?
Readers spontaneously and purposefully ask questions before, during,
and after reading.
Readers ask questions to
clarify meaning
speculate about text yet to be read
determine an author’s style, intent, content, or format
focus attention on specific components of the text
locate a specific answer in the text or consider rhetorical questions
inspired by the text.
Readers determine whether the answers to their questions can be
found in the text or whether they will need to infer the answer from
the text, their background knowledge, and/or an outside source.
Readers understand that many of the most intriguing questions are
not answered explicitly in the text, but are left to the reader’s inter-
pretation.
Readers understand that hearing others’ questions inspires new ones
of their own; likewise, listening to others’ answers can also inspire
new thinking.
Readers understand that the process of questioning is used in other
areas of their lives, both personal and academic.
Readers understand that asking questions deepens their comprehension.
(Adapted from Keene and PEBC)
Tried and True Texts for Asking Questions
All I See by Cynthia Rylant
Amelias Road by Linda Jacobs Altman
An Angel for Solomon Singer by Cynthia Rylant
Fly Away Home by Eve Bunting
Grandfather Twilight by Barbara Berger
The Lotus Seed by Sherry Garland
Monarch Butterfly by Gail Gibbons
The Stranger by Chris Van Allsburg
The Trumpet of the Swan by E. B. White
Why Is the Sky Blue? by Sally Grindley
The Wise Woman and Her Secret by Eve Merriam
Yanni Rubbish by Shulamith Levey Oppenheim
Reading with Meaning
140
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
141
Determining
Importance
inNonfiction
10
Emily shares her learning
with the class.
Children determine
which questions they
want to pursue further.
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
W
hen are you going to teach us about those kind of books?” Madi
asks during share time, pointing to the red tubs of books
labeled Dinosaurs, Flight, Reptiles, Biographies, Animals, Cars
and Trucks, Magazines, Field Guides, First Discovery Books, Newspapers,
Maps and Atlases, Big Cats, Disasters, and more.
“You mean the nonfiction?” I answer, surprised. The rest of the class is
nodding, pointing, and bouncing up and down, letting me know they’re
interested in knowing more about those kinds of books, too. “We-ell,” I say,
“how about Monday?” Whoops of joy erupt from the troops, but I’m
thinking, “What are you saying? Monday’s only three days away!”
Wed been learning how and why readers determine importance in fic-
tion, and I’d been planning to wrap things up and move on to something
new. Wed spent five weeks on this strategy already, and the children had
learned how readers identify key themes in stories, make predictions about
the stories’ organization and content, and use what theyd learned about the
characteristics of fiction to distinguish important from unimportant infor-
mation. And theyd learned that determining whats important in fiction
often depends as much on the reader as it does on the text.
But now Madi had me thinking. I thought about her question and real-
ized how smart of her it was to wonder about “those kind of books.” I’d
assumed that somehow children already knew that nonfiction books
involved reading to learn—theyd been looking at and reading these books
all year, hadnt they? And I’d assumed that if they could read and understand
stories, they could read and understand informational books, too. I hadnt
really considered the importance of explicitly teaching them the difference.
I’d have taken a day or two to teach them about the table of contents,
the index, maybe even the glossary in such books—and, of course, to
explain that nonfiction gives us information that is true. But Madi was after
more than that. Shed learned how to determine importance in fiction. I
suspected she was wondering how to go about doing that in nonfiction—
and how to learn from those kinds of books, too.
That weekend I lugged home about twenty nonfiction books, vowing
to make good on my word. As I read through them, I noted their distin-
quishing characteristics and features, determining which ones I thought
were most important for children to learn. But by the time Sunday evening
rolled around, it became clear that before I could teach children how to use
the features of nonfiction in purposeful ways, I had to teach them what
nonfiction was.
Monday morning the meeting area is a sea of books about snakes, dol-
phins, gemstones, sharks, kittens, puppies, wolves, the ocean, shipwrecks,
Reading with Meaning
142
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
the human body, flowers, space, earthquakes, astronauts, cowboys, balleri-
nas, dinosaurs, soccer, Tiger Woods, volcanoes, bugs, and big trucks. My
purpose? Just as we teach children to use math manipulatives by giving
them time to “free explore” what they are and how they work, giving them
time to explore nonfiction provides them (and you) with experiences to
build on when more explicit teaching begins.
The childrens eyes light up when they enter the room; its almost as if
I’ve laid out doughnuts and milk. They scurry over, devouring one book
after another. “Ooohs” and “Aaahs” and “Check this out!” and “OHMY-
GOSH!” and “Can I have that shark one next?” let me know my plan is a
good one. Their enthusiasm is contagious—before long I’m down on the
floor right along with them, ooohing and aaahing and learning myself.
Questions naturally arise, and out come the Wonder Boxes. Children
begin recording questions like mad. “How can a wolf capture an elk when
the elk is so much bigger?” Devon wants to know (Figure 10.1). “Why are
some twisters big and others small?” Chris wonders. “How does a puppy
get out of its mamas tummy?” Caroline, Nicole, and Meghan ask (Figure
10.2). “This is perfect,” I think to myself. Children are loving the explo-
143
Chapter 10: Determining Importance in Nonfiction
FIGURE 10.1 Devons question
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
ration of nonfiction, their interest in Wonder Boxes has been renewed, and
they will have a wider variety of questions to choose from when it comes
time to select their most important ones and read for specific information.
Modeling Differences Between Fiction
and Nonfiction
I begin by holding up a copy of Grandfathers Journey by Allen Say. “What
type of text do you predict this is?” I ask. “Fiction!” the children reply.
“Knowing that its fiction, how might you expect the story to be organ-
ized?” Andrew predicts the story will have “a beginning, middle, and end.”
Others predict a setting, characters, a problem, some events that connect to
the problem, and a resolution.
“Good thinking!” I tell them. “You remembered what we learned
about fiction and how it is organized. Now can you predict what the story
might be about?” Wyatt predicts it might be about somebodys grandpa
Reading with Meaning
144
FIGURE 10.2 “How do puppies come out of their mama's tummy?”
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
who once went on a journey across the ocean to America. He thinks he’s
probably going to have some trouble on the way, like maybe robbers or a
war or something like that. But then he’ll meet some nice people and make
some new friends and get married and have kids and live happily ever after.”
I want Wyatt and his classmates to be this confident and articulate
when they make predictions about the organization and content of nonfic-
tion text, too. Just as with narrative text, teaching children that expository
text has predictable characteristics and features they can count on before
they read allows them to construct meaning more easily as they read.
I hold up a book entitled Bugs! Bugs! Bugs! by Jennifer Dussling.
“What do you notice about this type of text?” I ask the children as I leaf
through the book and read parts of it aloud. “It’s totally about bugs!” Cole
answers. “Youre right!” I tell him. “It is all about bugs. You noticed right
away that this kind of text is organized differently than fiction.
“You wont find a beginning, middle, or end in books like this. And
you wont find characters, problems, or resolutions either. Instead, these
kinds of books—you already know them as nonfiction—are organized
around specific topics and main ideas, and they try to teach you something.
Nonfiction writing gives you information that is true. Let’s read it and see
what we can learn. . . .”
Another day I talk with the children about how they can use what they
know about this type of text to make predictions about its content—what
the text might teach them. I say, “Remember when Wyatt was able to pre-
dict what might happen in Grandfathers Journey? He was able to do that
because hes learned, just like the rest of you, what to expect when you read
fiction. When readers read nonfiction, they make predictions about the
text, too. But they dont make predictions about the kinds of things they
expect will happen. They make predictions about the kinds of things they
expect to learn.
“When readers make predictions about what they’ll learn, they acti-
vate their schema about the topic and what they know about the type of
text they are about to read. Take a look at this book—Nature Watch Spiders
by Barbara Taylor. Right away, because of its title and the photographs on
the cover, I can tell it’s a nonfiction text and it’s going to be about spiders.
See all the different kinds of spiders on the cover? I dont know a lot about
spiders, but I do know they have eight legs, they spin intricate webs, and
theyre part of a group of small creatures called arachnids.
“I’m predicting this book will be about all the different kinds of spi-
ders in the world, and that maybe I’ll learn about where they live, what they
eat, their life cycles, and even which ones are dangerous to humans.” I flip
145
Chapter 10: Determining Importance in Nonfiction
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
through the book, checking the table of contents, the headings, and the
index, explaining how these features help me make predictions about the
text. I do the same with two or three other books.
The next day I ask the children to help me make predictions. I release
responsibility by
asking children to bring a nonfiction book they havent read to the
meeting area, get eye-to-eye and knee-to-knee with a partner, and
make predictions about what they expect to learn.
spreading fiction and nonfiction materials out in the meeting area,
asking children to get a partner, choose two or three items, and ask
themselves, “Is this fiction or nonfiction? How do we know?”
asking children to bring a nonfiction book and a fiction book to the
meeting area, get into pairs, and create a Venn diagram that shows
the two books’ differences and similarities. We then create one large
diagram that combines everyones thinking (see Figure 10.3).
In his book I See What You Mean, Steve Moline writes, “If we teach
children that all reading is ‘reading for story’ we overlook many key strate-
Reading with Meaning
146
FIGURE 10.3 Venn diagram: fiction and nonfiction
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
gies that we employ when reading selectively. Some of these strategies
include scanning, skimming, accessing the text through the index, using
headings and signposts to the information we want or just strolling through
the pictures in order to orientate ourselves in the text” (p. 8).
Children are surprised to learn that depending on their purposes for
reading, they dont have to read the text in order. I model using the various
nonfiction strategies, showing the children what it looks like, and what my
thinking is, as I skim and scan, access the index and the table of contents,
use the headings to guide me, read the picture captions, and so on—all to
find out what I need to know. I think aloud, too, about the information I
want to remember, and show how I use sticky notes, highlighters, and my
notebook to keep track of my learning.
Noticing and Remembering When We
Learn Something New
“Have you ever thought about the way you respond to new information?”
Steph Harvey asked me one day as we sat chatting away about nonfiction in
her sunlit writing room. “Have you ever noticed what your inner voice says
when you learn something new?” “Not really,” I answered, understanding
the inner voice part but unsure about what it was supposed to be saying. “It’s
something to think about,” she said, “and I have a hunch it’s important.”
(We dont always talk about this stuff, but sometimes we just cant help it.)
“Here, take a look at this,” she said, handing over a well-read National
Geographic. Think aloud as you read, and you’ll see what I mean.” I open
the magazines familiar yellow-bordered cover and land on an article called
“Deadlysilk” by Richard Conniff. “Wow, Steph, listen to this!” I say after a
few minutes. “Did you know that some spiders eat their webs and reweave
them up to five times a day? Thats amazing! I never knew that! And get
this—it’s the female spider who does all that weaving—once the males
reach maturity they wander around making love, not war. I didnt know
that either!”
Stephs staring and smiling at me, for once silent. “What?” I say, throwing
up my hands. “Did you hear yourself?” she asks, rattling off “Wow!” “Listen to
this!” “That’s amazing!” “I never knew that!” and “Get this!” adding, “See how
those words signal you youre learning something new?” “Oh my goodness,” I
say, “youre right!” (Add “Oh my goodness” to the list, too.) We go on to yak
about something else, but as usual, Steph has me thinking.
147
Chapter 10: Determining Importance in Nonfiction
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
“Boys and girls,” I say the next day, “wait until you hear what I learned
from my friend Steph yesterday.” I tell them the whole story, and think aloud
some more about the spider and its remarkable web to show them what I
mean. They want to discover their inner voices, too, and record the words
that help them recognize theyre learning something new on chart paper.
Soon I hear their cries:
Awesome! Can you believe some ants squirt smelly acid when theyre
scared?”
Sweet! It takes only eight and a half minutes for a space shuttle to
reach space.”
Cool! Jumbo jets in the future will have two stories and can carry
more than five hundred people! I never knew that!”
Whoa! When Mount Vesuvius erupted it buried the city of Pompeii
under a layer of ash that was twenty feet thick. Thats as high as our school!”
Yikes! I just learned that a meteor the size of Mount Everest hit our
planet sixty-five million years ago and maybe caused the dinosaurs to be
extinct!”
“So how will you remember all the things youve learned?” I ask. “I
know!” Meghan volunteers. “Let’s put an N and an L on a sticky note for
new learning,’ and then just write the most important part—and the title
of the book, and the page number, too, so we can find it and read it again if
we need to.” It’s unanimous.
Convention Notebooks
My teammate Michelle DuMoulin and I knew the importance of teaching
our kids about the conventions, or features, of nonfiction. We knew this
helped focus and support young readers, and that even emergent readers
could determine importance and construct meaning by paying close atten-
tion to features such as photographs, diagrams, captions, and comparisons.
But we also knew we needed to build childrens background knowledge and
explicitly teach them what nonfiction conventions are, what kinds of infor-
mation these conventions give us, and how they help us determine what is
important in a text. We knew what we wanted to teach kids; it was the how
that had us stymied. We vowed, as we sometimes do, that we wouldnt go
home until we had a plan.
That evening Convention Notebooks were born! We finally figured
out (hunger may have had something to do with it) a way to teach kids to
Reading with Meaning
148
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
recognize, remember, and begin to understand the purposes of the nonfic-
tion features they found. Measuring nine inches square, Convention
Notebooks contain twelve or so sheets of blank white paper and a construc-
tion paper cover and back. This is how they work:
Each day for two weeks Michelle and I focus on a different conven-
tion. Say our focus is on comparisons. Before class, we search our nonfic-
tion libraries for at least five or six places where comparisons have been used
and flag the pages with sticky notes. When its time for the lesson, the chil-
dren and I locate and name the comparisons weve found and read the sur-
rounding text aloud. But noticing and naming nonfiction conventions are
not enough. We also think aloud about how they help us as readers; we
think aloud about the purpose of each one.
Next, Michelle and I ask children to find examples of that same conven-
tion in books from the classroom or the library and either record one example
in their notebooks or create an example of their own. Children share their dis-
coveries in small groups each day, and we record our learning on a two-column
anchor chart headed “What do we know about nonfiction conventions?”
Convention Purpose
Labels Help the reader identify a picture or photograph
and/or its parts
Photographs Help the reader understand exactly what some-
thing looks like
Captions Help the reader better understand a picture or
photograph
Comparisons Help the reader understand the size of one thing
by comparing it to the size of something familiar
Cutaways Help the reader understand something by look-
ing at it from the inside
Maps Help the reader understand where things are in
the world
Types of print Help the reader by signaling, “Look at me! I’m
important!”
Close-ups Help the reader see details in something small
Tables of contents Help the reader identify key topics in the book
in the order they are presented
Index An alphabetical list of almost everything covered
in the text, with page numbers
Glossary Helps the reader define words contained in the
text
149
Chapter 10: Determining Importance in Nonfiction
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Convention Notebooks not only build background knowledge for
text features that children encounter in their reading, but they also can be
used as resources when children are asked to synthesize information in
order to answer research questions. The notebooks help children think
through which convention(s) would showcase their information best.
Locating Specific Information
Throughout our study of questioning and nonfiction, I ask the children to
place a Wonder Card or two into a basket. Two or three days a week we
draw one out and search for its answer. First I model for children what I do
when I want to find out specific information. I show them how to think
aloud about certain questions:
What do I already know about the topic?
What type of book or other source will help me best?
Where will I find the information?
How is the information organized in the source? How will I go about
locating what I need?
Then, after I’ve looked through the source of information:
What did I learn? How can I synthesize my learning for myself and
others?
I gradually release responsibility to children by asking the same ques-
tions of the whole group. When (or if) we find the answer to our Wonder
Card question, the child who asked the question records its answer on the
back of the card and cites the source (author, title, date). Later I ask chil-
dren to get into small groups or pairs; each group draws a question from the
basket and works together to explore the answer. Questions we cant answer
are posted outside the classroom, under a sign that reads “HELP! Can you
help us with the answers to these questions? If you can, PLEASE write a
note to us and put it on our teacher’s desk. [At this point we include a map
to show readers how to get to our classroom.] Thanks from all of us in
Room 104.”
Reading with Meaning
150
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Throughout this study I work closely with Jennifer Shouse, our tal-
ented librarian. She teaches the children about call numbers, where refer-
ence materials are located in the library and the kinds of information they
provide, and how to access Ask Jeeves, the World Book Online, and First
Connections: The Golden Book Encyclopedia on the computer. When chil-
dren print out information, Jennifer and I teach them to write in the mar-
gins and highlight the key concepts they want to remember.
■■■
By now, the children have learned some of the characteristics of nonfic-
tion. Theyve learned how to distinguish it from fiction, and how to
make predictions about its organization and content. Theyve become
familiar with the features of nonfiction books and their purposes, and
how to locate specific information. Most important, they’ve learned that
reading nonfiction is about reading to learn. I think theyre ready to put
all that learning to good use. Bring on the Wonder Boxes, and let’s find
out!
I ask children to find a spot in the room, spread out their Wonder
Cards, and choose three or four questions that they care about most.
“Which ones are you most passionate about?” I ask. “Which ones come
from your heart?” Once theyve decided, I ask them to put the questions
theyve selected in order of importance at the front of their Wonder
Boxes.
They cant wait! The next day they arm themselves with their Wonder
Boxes, sticky notes, bright yellow highlighters, pencils, and notebooks, and
descend on the library and into the corners and spaces of the classroom,
spreading their materials out on tables and floor. I’m struck by their inde-
pendence. No one is asking me where the reptile books are, or to read their
book to them, or wandering aimlessly about. And not one soul is copying
sentence after sentence into a notebook.
Children synthesize and share their learning in a variety of ways.
These decisions are essentially theirs to make. I used to show the children
examples of ways to share their learning, but I’ve come to believe that limits
their capacity to think creatively. I make sure materials are in ample supply,
including posterboard for those who want it; I ask only that the children
include their question, evidence of what they learned, and at least one non-
fiction convention, and that they cite their source(s) of information. The
next section shows some of the ways children share their learning.
151
Chapter 10: Determining Importance in Nonfiction
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Reading with Meaning
152
Evidence of Understanding and Independence
Bold print and head-
ings tell you what the
author thinks is
important. The index
and table of contents
let you choose for
yourself.
Wyatt
Themes go with
fiction and learning
goes with nonfiction.”
Maddy
You know how when
it rains? The grass and
flowers and trees soak
up all the water they
need, and the rest just
runs on down the
street. We soak up
what’s important to
us, too, and let the rest
of it go away.”
Christopher
The feelings that
stories leave you with
let you know what’s
most important.”
Nina
Exploring why dogs bark
Jamies ladybug
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
153
Chapter 10: Determining Importance in Nonfiction
Because our schema
is different, the things
that are important to
us are different, too.
Different things are
important to different
people.”
Caroline
You learn and
remember the things
that are important to
you. If you dont care
about it, you wont
remember it.”
Andrew
The title gives you a
big clue about what is
going to be impor-
tant.”
Molly
Imagine being bit”
Megans comparison
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Reading with Meaning
154
Mitchs project, “Why does deinonychus run so fast?”
Frank determines which school rules are most important
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Determining Importance at a Glance
Whats Key for Kids?
Readers distinguish the differences between fiction and nonfiction.
Readers distinguish important from unimportant information in
order to identify key ideas or themes as they read.
Readers use their knowledge of narrative and expository text features
to make predictions about text organization and content.
Readers utilize text features to help them distinguish important from
unimportant information.
Readers use their knowledge of important and relevant parts of text
to answer questions and synthesize text for themselves and others.
(Adapted from Keene and PEBC)
Tried and True Texts for Determining Importance in Nonfiction
Series:
Dorling Kindersley Readers, DK Publishing, New York
I Can Read About . . ., Troll Associates, New York
First Discovery Books, Scholastic, New York
Eyewitness Books, Knopf, New York
Newspapers:
Your local paper
Weekly Reader, Box 120033, Stamford, CT 06912
Magazines:
National Geographic for Kids, National Geographic Society, 17th and
M Sts. N.W., Washington, DC 20036
Time for Kids/Big Picture Edition, Time, Inc., Time-Life Building,
1271 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10020
Ranger Rick, National Wildlife Federation, 8925 Leesburg Pike,
Vienna, VA 22184
Zoo Books, Wildlife Education Ltd., 9820 Willow Creek Rd., San
Diego, CA 92131
Calliope: World History for Young People, Cobblestone Publishing, 30
Grove St., Peterborough, NH 03458
Kids Discover, 170 Fifth Ave., New York, NY 10010
Cobblestone: The History Magazine for Young People, Cobblestone
Publishing, 30 Grove St., Peterborough, NH 03458
155
Chapter 10: Determining Importance in Nonfiction
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Field guides:
Peterson Field Guides for Young Naturalists, including volumes on
songbirds, backyard birds, caterpillars, and butterflies. Houghton
Mifflin, Boston, MA.
National Audubon Society First Field Guides, including volumes on
reptiles, weather, trees, shells, amphibians, fishes, rocks and minerals,
insects, and the night sky. Scholastic, New York.
CDs:
First Connections: The Golden Book Encyclopedia. Western Publishing
Co./Josten Learning Corp.
National Geographic Society, various titles (1-800-342-4460)
For a more complete list of resources please see the Appendixes and
References in Strategies That Work: Teaching Comprehension to
Enhance Understanding by Stephanie Harvey and Anne Goudvis.
2000. Stenhouse Publishers, Portland, ME.
Reading with Meaning
156
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
157
Synthesizing
Information
11
Writing a note to the
teacher keeps interrup-
tions to a minimum
during conferences.
Emphasizing writing in
response to reading
enhances comprehension.
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
F
rank pushes “play” and “Oh, What a Beautiful Morning” blasts out
of the CD player. Whit quickly adjusts the volume, and the class and
I sing our way over to the meeting area. Frank invites us to read the
morning message theyve written; he points to the words as we read, “Hi,
everybody! Whit and Frank are going to teach a lesson on SYNTHESIS [all
caps, bold print, red marker] today. Are you up for a challenge?”
A chart entitled “Whit and Frank synthesizing Oliver Button Is a
Sissy” is push-pinned to the board. Below the heading theyve drawn seven
3-by-5-inch rectangles, just the size of their sticky notes, with plus signs
separating each one. After the seventh one, theyve drawn a big equals sign
with the words “Finl Sinthasis” written after it. I’m not sure exactly what
theyre up to, but I cant wait to find out. I’m pretty sure it’s going to be
good.
It’s more than good. “You know how weve been learning about syn-
thesis?” Whit begins. “Well, Frank and I had so much thinking about it
that we want to share it with you. Frank is going to read Oliver Button Is a
Sissy aloud, and I’m going to show you how we synthesized it. Are you
ready?”
Frank reads the Tomie dePaola story aloud, and on the pages contain-
ing a sticky note, on which is written their synthesis of the story so far,
Whit stops the story, reads the note, and places it in one of the squares (see
Figure 11.1). When they get to the equals sign, Whit says, “So you see how
we got to the final synthesis? We just kept adding on and adding on and
adding on to our thinking. It got bigger and bigger and bigger, and now we
totally know what the book is all about! You might want to try it in your
reading today. Happy reading!”
■■■
My colleagues and I had been studying synthesis for years. We even wrote
an article about it for Language Arts in December 1996. But I never seemed
to get very far with it in the classroom. “Oops!” I’d say. “Its the middle of
May. No time for synthesis again this year.” (You may guess the real reason
why I never got around to it.) So what changed? What made a difference?
What helped me understand that synthesis is more than just a fancy name
for summary? It was Ellin Keene who asked me questions just like these one
night after school.
She found me with my shoes off, sprawled on the floor, surrounded
by charts and childrens work. I’d spread everything out, thinking about
how I might write this, the last chapter of the book youre reading, on syn-
thesis. She kicked her shoes off, too, and joined me on the floor. We were
Reading with Meaning
158
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
struck by the kids’ work, and she asked me again: “Come on. What made
the difference?”
“It’s the ripple, Ellin,” I answer. “Remember when we were fooling
around with synthesis several years ago, and you launched it with Tea with
Milk by Allen Say? You told me it was simple elements of thought trans-
formed into a complex whole. But you told the kids that synthesis is like
throwing a rock into a pond: first there’s the splash, and then the water
ripples out, making little waves that get bigger and bigger. You likened that
to synthesis, remember? You said that as you read, your thinking evolves as
you encounter new information, and the meaning gets bigger and bigger,
just like the ripples in the pond. I kept playing with that analogy and two
years later, voila!”
Ellin leaves, but I remain sprawled on the floor, still surrounded by
papers, still wondering how best to share what I’ve learned about synthesis.
159
Chapter 11: Synthesizing Information
FIGURE 11.1 Whit and Frank’s synthesis
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
I take a look (again) at Whits drawing of Oliver Button with the big red
heart, Bens synthesis wheel and his amazing definition, and the synthesis of
The Story of Jumping Mouse that Max has recorded in his notebook. I decide
that the children are the ones who can help me.
Anchor Lessons
Readers monitor overall meaning, important concepts, and
themes as they read, understanding that their thinking evolves
in the process
I explain the ripple in the pond metaphor to the kids, and read and synthe-
size the book Smoky Night for them. That afternoon I transfer my synthesis
word for word (or nearly) onto a chart entitled “Synthesizing Smoky Night
(think aloud by Mrs. Miller)” (see Figure 11.2). I want the children to be
Reading with Meaning
160
FIGURE 11.2 Synthesizing Smoky Night by Eve Bunting
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
able to take a closer look at how my thinking evolved as well as help them
begin to track the language of synthesis.
Children catch on quickly—it seems as though weve been building
up to this moment all year—and theyre eager to have at it on their own.
Ben asks me to make a record sheet “that has the ripple on it,” and that
night I’m happy to comply. We use the sheet to record the evolution of our
thinking as we read The Alphabet Tree by Leo Lionni, and many later opt to
use it to keep track of how their thinking evolves as they read independ-
ently. (See Bret and Maggies written synthesis of A Color of His Own by Leo
Lionni, Figure 11.3.)
Not Ben. He pulls me to the side, thrusts the record sheet my way, and
scrunches up his face. “This isnt really what I meant,” he tells me, shaking
his head. When I ask him “what he really meant” he says, “Here, let me
show you.” He draws a small circle on the back of the sheet, then another,
larger one around the first; I can tell now hes going for the full ripple effect.
“I see what you mean, Ben, but wont it be hard to write in a circle?” I ask
him. “No,” he answers, “it’ll be easy!”
It was. I drew the form to his specifications and Ben tried it out the
next day, requested a few minor adjustments, and was then ready to teach
his classmates how it worked. It was a hit, of course, and not even one child
161
Chapter 11: Synthesizing Information
FIGURE 11.3 Bret and Maggies synthesis
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
got dizzy. (As for their teacher? Well . . . have you ever tried reading in a
circle?) Rian and Madis synthesis of The Library in Figure 11.4 uses the
form that will forever be known as “Bens synthesis wheel.”
“So, Ben,” I ask him several days later, “now that you are such an
expert at synthesizing, how would you define it? How would you explain
synthesis to somebody who didnt know what it means?” He fumbles for
the words he wants, and finally says, “Let me think about that.”
Fifteen minutes later he seeks me out and hands me a construction
paper circle. “Here, I figured it out,” he tells me. “This is what synthesis is.”
“It’s beautiful, Ben,” I say, admiring the brightly colored blue, orange,
red, and green circles, “but how does this explain synthesis?”
“Let’s sit down,” he says, realizing this may take some time, “and I’ll
explain it to you. See the blue circle in the middle? That’s what youre think-
Reading with Meaning
162
FIGURE 11.4 Bens synthesis wheel, as rendered by Rian and Madi
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
ing first. Then see the next circle? The one thats mostly orange with just a
little bit of blue? It shows how you still keep some of your beginning think-
ing, but when you learn more, you have even more thinking to add to it.
Your thinking gets bigger. See the third circle? Its got some blue, and some
orange, but it’s mostly red, because now theres even more new thinking,
youre going deeper and deeper into the text. And see the next one? It’s
mostly green. You see, the ripple isnt just a solid line; some of the best think-
ing leaks right on through.” (See the last page of the color insert.)
I’m speechless. Ben, age six, has captured (synthesized?) the nature of
synthesis. Where was he ten years ago when I needed him? (Oh, right—he
wasnt even born.) I think his work is so brilliant I stop the entire workshop
so Ben can share what hes done with his classmates. Theyre not nearly as
impressed. “We can draw synthesis, too!” they inform me, and they can—
and do. (See pages 169 and 170 for Rian and Madisons representations of
synthesis.)
Readers retell what they have read as a way of synthesizing
I think of retelling as a fairly literal recounting of what children have read,
learned, and remembered. To give the kids a framework for thinking about
retelling as they synthesize what theyve read, I teach them to
tell what’s important,
in a way that makes sense,
without telling too much.
When teaching children how to retell as they synthesize fiction, I
model the activity using familiar picture books and fairy tales. The children
already know how stories are organized; their identifying the setting, char-
acters, problem(s), an event or two, and the problems resolution help focus
and support their understanding of the book.
When teaching kids to retell information in nonfiction text, the
framework for thinking remains the same, but the focus is on what they
have learned, rather than the elements of story. I show them how to take
notes by writing down only a few important words—just enough to help
them remember what theyve learned—and ask them to share their learn-
ing, sometimes orally, sometimes in writing, in their own words.
I gradually release responsibility by
stopping now and then as I read a story aloud, asking children to get
eye-to-eye and knee-to-knee in order to synthesize the text so far,
then collaborating and charting their thoughts in the whole group;
163
Chapter 11: Synthesizing Information
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
asking children to read independently for five or ten minutes, then
stopping them to find a partner and retell the story or what they have
learned in their own words;
asking children who are reading the same text to synthesize it when
they finish, then get together and compare their thinking.
I’ve learned that some of the best ways to give children practice and
highlight some of the purposes of retelling occur in the moment. For
example, when Maggie comes back after being absent, I might say,
“Welcome back, Maggie! We read another chapter in My Father’s Dragon
while you were gone. Would you like someone to retell it for you?” Or “We
read a book about the Underground Railroad while you were gone. Who
will synthesize what we learned for Maggie?”
During share time, when a child is talking about a book most of the
class is unfamiliar with, I might say, “Molly, could you synthesize your book
for us? That will help us better understand your point.”
When a child is going on and on about a story, a movie, a sleep-over,
or a play date, I might say, “That sounds so cool [or fun, or interesting]!
Take a minute and see if you can synthesize all that information.
Remember, think about what’s important, tell it in a way that makes sense,
and try hard not to tell too much!”
And I often say at the end of the day, “When you go home today and
your mom or dad says, ‘What happened in school today? What did you
learn?’ what might you say? Lets synthesize our learning now so youll be
ready!”
Readers capitalize on opportunities to share, recommend, and
criticize books they have read
Children recommend books to each other all year long (see the photo at the
start of Chapter 4), and I give them opportunities to synthesize the books
they recommend. I bring in several book reviews from the newspaper, and
together the children and I decide on what information to include and
what form their review will take. Whits recommendation of Oliver Button
Is a Sissy is shown in Figure 11.5. His review does a fine job of telling what’s
important in a way that makes sense without telling too much.
Readers extend their synthesis of the literal meaning of a text to
the inferential level
“Lilli, would you like to share your synthesis of the story?” I ask. I’d just
read John Steptoes The Story of Jumping Mouse aloud, having paused at cer-
Reading with Meaning
164
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
tain points for the children to write down their thoughts on the story. “Yes,
thank you,” answers Lilli. (Figure 11.6 shows her writing):
I’m thinking it is about a mouse who is going to go on an adven-
ture to find his dream. But now I’m thinking he will get caught
by the snake and he wont be able to go on his adventure.
And now I’m thinking he will get to the far-off land with the
help he gets from the animals, and his hope and faith. And
along the way he will meet more animals to give and to get help
from. Maybe it is like a heaven place and he will get his smelling
back and his seeing back and all he things he lost, he will get
back.
And now I’m thinking he will be able to now see and hear
because the magic frog turned him into an eagle and he got back
what he had given away.
I think the lesson is, if you give you will get more than you
gave.
165
Chapter 11: Synthesizing Information
FIGURE 11.5 Whit’s review of Oliver Button Is a Sissy by Tomie dePaolo
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Figure 11.7 shows Max’s perspective on the same story.
For this lesson, I tell children I will read a story aloud, and that they’ll
be asked to synthesize both during and after the reading. I tell them it doesnt
matter how they choose to synthesize, only that they do it in a thoughtful,
organized way. Once children have selected the supplies they need, we
regroup in the meeting area and I begin the story. I read for a while, then
stop for them (and me) to synthesize the story up to that point. I repeat the
procedure three or four more times, giving children time at the end to
reflect and connect their thinking into a larger, more meaningful whole.
The Story of Jumping Mouse wasnt the first story we read this way. I
began with fables. I’d read several familiar ones aloud and do a basic
retelling for the children, thinking aloud about how I infer the lesson, or
moral, of each one. Fables are great here—they’re short and you can do two,
three, or even four in a day, showing children how readers extend their lit-
eral synthesis (of the fable) to an inferential one (the moral or lesson).
Children love listening to fables, sitting with a partner to retell and
infer their lessons, and of course just sharing them. Fables can take over
Reading with Meaning
166
FIGURE 11.6 Lilli’s synthesis of The Story of Jumping Mouse by John Steptoe
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
work activity time, too, what with children acting them out, writing their
own, and creating scenes, characters, and events from their favorites with
wooden blocks, Legos, and Beanie Babies.
Once children have worked with fables for a while, I increase the
sophistication of the read-alouds with stories like Lauren Millss The Rag
Coat, Byrd Baylors The Table Where Rich People Sit, Estelle Condras See the
Ocean, John Steptoes The Story of Jumping Mouse, and Arnold Lobels
Fables. It was right after the Jumping Mouse lesson that Whit and Frank cre-
ated their Oliver Button chart. And as you may imagine, it wasnt long
before other charts were vying for space on walls, cupboards, and doors.
As I finish this last chapter on synthesis, I’m thinking, as I always do
when I finish a comprehension study, “What worked well? What didnt?”
and “What might I do differently next year?” I’m also thinking about what
I learned this year about synthesizing and learning from Whit, Ben, Lilli,
and their twenty-four classmates. I’m struck again by their intelligence and
the amazing potential they bring to the classroom.
167
Chapter 11: Synthesizing Information
FIGURE 11.7 Maxs synthesis of The Story of Jumping Mouse by John Steptoe
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Bens artistic definition of synthesis helped me understand that as
readers encounter new information, it doesnt necessarily change everything
that has come before. Readers actively revise their synthesis as they read but
some of the best thinking leaks right on through.” Lilli and Max, through
their synthesis of The Story of Jumping Mouse, taught me that the search for
meaning is different for each child because meaning is constructed from
individual cognitive processes. And Whit’s depiction of Oliver Button and
the words, “Be who you want to be. Trust your heart” showed me that keep-
ing a cognitive synthesis during reading can help the reader identify and
depict themes that connect to the overall meaning of the text.
Reading with Meaning
168
Evidence of Understanding and Independence
Synthesis is like
inferring, only
super-sized!”
Madi
If you dont ever
change your mind,
youre not really
synthesizing.”
Mitchell
Synthesizing is like
putting a puzzle
together. You have to
sort out your thinking
and put it in the right
place.”
Cory
Rileys summer letter, still contemplating synthesis
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
169
Chapter 11: Synthesizing Information
Your whole life is a
synthesis. First you are
a baby and you learn
a little bit of stuff.
Then you get older
and learn more and
more and more.
Frank
When you synthesize,
it means you are ready
to challenge your
mind.”
Molly
When you synthesize,
you say in your head,
I used to think this,
but now Im thinking
this.
Meghan
When I synthesize,
my mind is changing,
my ideas are chang-
ing, my thinking is
changing.”
Brendan
Isabellas synthesis of inferring, as a third grader
Childrens synthesis of The Lazy Bear by Brian Wildsmith
Rians definition of synthesis
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Reading with Meaning
170
Frank’s definition of synthesis
Madisons definition of synthesis
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Synthesis at a Glance
Whats Key for Kids?
Readers monitor overall meaning, important concepts, and themes in
text as they read, understanding that their thinking evolves in the
process.
Readers retell what they have read as a way of synthesizing.
Readers capitalize on opportunities to share, recommend, and criti-
cize books they have read.
Readers extend their synthesis of the literal meaning of a text to the
inferential level.
Readers synthesize to understand more clearly what they have read.
(Adapted from Keene and PEBC)
Tried and True Texts for Synthesizing Information
The Alphabet Tree by Leo Lionni
Charlie Anderson by Barbara Abercrombie
Fables by Arnold Lobel
Frederick’s Fables by Leo Lionni
Oliver Button Is a Sissy by Tomie dePaola
The Rag Coat by Lauren Mills
See the Ocean by Estelle Condra
Smoky Night by Eve Bunting
The Story of Jumping Mouse by John Steptoe
The Table Where Rich People Sit by Byrd Baylor
Tea with Milk by Allen Say
171
Chapter 11: Synthesizing Information
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
This page intentionally left blank
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
173
In June
I
t’s a late afternoon in June. The children have gone, and save for a lone
cricket (could it possibly be the same one?) chirping from the bug box
in a faraway corner, the room is quiet. It’s the last day of school, and my
desk is a heap of bath beads and oils, plates of candy and cookies, a pair of
purple dangling earrings, roses, daisies, plants, and gift certificates for
movies, a facial, and—glory be!—a ninety-minute massage.
But I know what lies underneath all the goodies. There are the cumu-
lative records into which I need to glue childrens pictures and record test
scores, a ratty-looking register I must reconcile and ink in, and report cards
I have to mail to those children who are already on summer vacation. And
then theres the room that needs to be packed up, the plants that need to be
wedged into my trunk for their yearly pilgrimage to their summer home,
and piles of thank-you notes that need to be written and mailed.
What’s a teacher to do? This one makes her way over to the once-white
chair in the corner and settles in to watch the sunlight as it streams in
through the windows. I think about my animal lovers, Irish step dancers,
and Kenny Loggins enthusiasts. I wonder what life will hold for them, and
I wish for a peaceful world that appreciates all they have to offer.
Gone are the interviews and portraits with their too-high-on-the-fore-
head eyes, crinkled-paper hair, glued-on earrings, and bright red lips that
once smiled back at me. Crayons and pencils, once pointed and lying just
so, are but little nubs of lead and wax. Picture frames that held the smiles of
this years girls and boys are empty. And I’m feeling, as I always do this time
of year, just a little empty myself.
Epilogue:
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
My eye catches the dry-erase board across the way. “Dear First
Graders,” it reads. “Welcome to first grade! You are going to LOVE it!!!
Love, the Second Graders.”
Taped right below the message is a poem entitled “Like Magic.”
Just when I’m about to get misty, Ellie, whom I’ve known since she
was three, races into the room and jumps into my arms. “I’m in first grade
now!” she proclaims. “And guess what? You get to be my teacher!”
Reading with Meaning
174
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
175
References
Childrens Literature
Abercrombie, Barbara. 1990. Charlie Anderson. New York: M. K. McElderry Books.
Adoff, Arnold. 2000. Touch the Poem. New York: Blue Sky Press.
Aliki. 1975. The Two of Them. New York: Mulberry Books.
Altman, Linda Jacobs. 1993. Amelias Road. New York: Lee & Low Books.
Arnold, Tedd. 1987. No Jumping on the Bed. New York: Penguin.
Atwater, Richard, and Florence Atwater. 1938. Mr. Popper’s Penguins. Boston: Little,
Brown.
Avi. 1995. Poppy. New York: Orchard Books.
———. 1998. Poppy and Rye. New York: Avon Books.
Barchas, Sarah. 1975. I Was Walking Down the Road. New York: Scholastic.
Baylor, Byrd. 1994. The Table Where Rich People Sit. New York: Macmillan.
Bentley, Dawn. 1998. The Three Little Pigs. Kansas City, MO: Piggy Toes Press.
Berger, Barbara. 1984. Grandfather Twilight. New York: Philomel Books.
———. 1997. A Lot of Otters. New York: Penguin Putnam.
Brinkloe, Julie. 1986. Fireflies. Chicago: Scott Foresman.
Brothers Grimm. (Retold by Barbara Cooney.) 1965. Snow White and Rose Red. New
York: Delacorte Press.
Brown, Marc Tolon. 1985. Hand Rhymes. New York: E. P. Dutton.
Brutschy, Jennifer. 1993. Winter Fox. New York: Knopf.
Bunting, Eve. 1988. How Many Days to America? A Thanksgiving Story. New York:
Clarion Books.
———. 1991. Fly Away Home. New York: Clarion Books.
———. 1994. Smoky Night. San Diego: Harcourt Brace.
———. 2001. The Wall. New York: Clarion Books.
Carlstrom, Nancy White. 1987. Wild, Wild Sunflower Child. New York: Macmillan.
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
———. 1993. What Does the Rain Play?New York: Macmillan.
Coffelt, Nancy. 1993. Dogs in Space. San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
Condra, Estelle. 1994. See the Ocean.Nashville, TN: Ideals Childrens Books.
dePaola, Tomie. 1975. Strega Nona. New York: Prentice Hall.
———. 1979. Oliver Button Is a Sissy.San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
———. 1988. Now One Foot, Now the Other.New York: Trumpet Club.
Dodd, Anne Westcott. 1992. Footprints and Shadows.New York: Simon & Schuster
Books for Young Readers.
Donnelly, Judy. 1987. The Titanic Lost and Found.New York: Random House.
———. 1988. Tuts Mummy Lost and Found.New York: Random House.
Downs, Robert Bingham. 1964. The Bear Went over the Mountain.New York:
Macmillan.
Dussling, Jennifer. 1998. Bugs! Bugs! Bugs!New York: DK Publishers.
Finch, Mary. 2001. The Three Billy Goats Gruff.New York: Barefoot Books.
Fox, Mem. 1988. Koala Lou.San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
———. 1994. Tough Boris.San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
Francen, Mike. 1999. I Have a Dream. Tulsa, OK: Francen World Outreach
Publications.
Gagliardi, Maria Francesca. 1969. The Magic Fish.New York: Putnam.
Galdone, Paul. 1977. The Taileypo.Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
Gannet, Ruth Stiles. 1997. [1948]. My Fathers Dragon.New York: Random House.
———. 1987. My Father the Dragon Series. New York: Random House.
Garland, Sherry. 1993. The Lotus Seed.San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
Gibbons, Gail. 1989. Monarch Butterfly.New York: Holiday House.
Greenfield, Eloise. 1978. Honey, I Love, and Other Love Poems.New York: Crowell.
Grindley, Sally. 1997. Why Is the Sky Blue? New York: Simon & Schuster Books for
Young Readers.
Hansel and Gretel.England: Ladybird.
Harris, Beth Coombe. 1993. Little Green Frog.Lewisville, TX: School of Tomorrow.
Heard, Georgia. 1992. Creatures of Earth, Sea, and Sky.Honesdale, PA: Wordsong.
Henkes, Kevin. 1991. Chrysanthemum. New York: Greenwillow Books.
Hill, Barbara Tinker. 1976. The Little Yellow Duck.[n.p.]
Hoffman, Mary. 1991. Amazing Grace.New York: Dial Books for Young Readers.
Houston, Gloria. 1992. My Great-Aunt Arizona.New York: HarperCollins.
Howard, Jane R. 1985. When Im Sleepy.New York: Dutton.
Keats, Ezra Jack. 1996. The Snowy Day.New York: Viking Press.
Kilborne, Sarah S. 1994. Peach and Blue.New York: Knopf.
Kramer, S. A. 1997. Ice Stars.New York: Grosset and Dunlap.
Kraus, Robert. 1970. Whose Mouse Are You?New York: Aladdin Books.
———. 1986. Where Are You Going, Little Mouse?New York: Greenwillow Books.
Langstaff, John M. 1974. Oh, a Hunting We Will Go.New York: Atheneum.
LeGuin, Ursula. 1988. Catwings. New York: Orchard Books.
Lewis, C. S. 2000. The Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe.New York: HarperCollins.
Levy, David H., ed. 1996. Stars and Planets.New York: Time-Life Books.
Lindgren, Astrid. 1950. Pippi Longstocking.Trans. by Florence Lamborn. New York:
Viking Press.
Reading with Meaning
176
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Lionni, Leo. 1968. The Alphabet Tree. New York: Pantheon.
———. 1975. A Color of His Own. New York: Pantheon Books.
———. 1985. Frederick’s Fables: A Leo Lionni Treasury of Favorite Stories. New York:
Pantheon Books.
Littledale, Freya. 1966. The Magic Fish. New York: Scholastic.
Lobel, Arnold. 1972. Mouse Tales. New York: Harper & Row.
———. 1977. Mouse Soup. New York: Harper & Row.
———. 1980. Fables. New York: HarperTrophy.
Long, Sylvia. 2000. Hush Little Baby. San Francisco: Chronicle Books.
Marshak, Suzanna. 1991. I Am the Ocean. New York: Arcade Publishers.
Martin, Bill, Jr., and John Archambault. 1989. Chika Chika Boom Boom. New York:
Simon & Schuster Books for Young Readers.
Marzollo, Jean. 1978. Close Your Eyes. New York: Dial Press.
Mayer, Mercer. 1977. Just Me and My Dad. Racine, WI: Western.
Mazer, Anne. 1991. The Salamander Room. New York: Knopf.
McLerran, Alice. 1992. Roxaboxen. New York: Puffin Books.
McKissack, Patricia. 1986. Flossie and the Fox. New York: Dial Books for Young
Readers.
McKissack, Patricia, and Frederick McKissack. 1944. The Little Yellow Duck.
Danbury, CT: Childrens Press.
Mellonie, Bryan, and Robert Ingpen. 1983. Lifetimes: A Beautiful Way to Explain
Death to Children. New York: Bantam Books.
Merriam, Eve. 1992. Goodnight to Annie: An Alphabet Lullaby. New York: Hyperion
Books for Children.
———. 1993. Quiet, Please. New York: Simon & Schuster Books for Young Readers.
———. 1999. The Wise Woman and Her Secret. New York: Aladdin Picture Books.
Mills, Lauren. 1991. The Rag Coat. Boston: Little, Brown.
Milton, Joyce. 1992. Wild, Wild Wolves. New York: Random House.
Minarik, Else Holmelund. 1957. Little Bear. New York: Harper and Row.
Mountain Streams: Nature’s Relaxing Sounds. 1999. Sounds of Nature. Masters Series.
Compact disc.
Munsch, Robert N. 1980. The Paper Bag Princess. Toronto: Annick Press.
Muse, Clarence. 1932. Way Down South. Hollywood, CA: D. G. Fischer.
My First Real Mother Goose Board Book. 2000. New York: Scholastic.
Opie, Iona, ed. 1999. Here Comes Mother Goose. Cambridge, MA: Candlewick.
Oppenheim, Shulamith Levey. 1999. Yanni Rubbish. Honesdale, PA: Boyds Mills Press.
Park, Frances, and Ginger Park. 2000. The Royal Bee. Honesdale, PA: Boyds Mills
Press.
Parish, Peggy. 1985. Amelia Bedelia Goes Camping. New York: Morrow.
Penn, Audrey. 1993. The Kissing Hand. Washington, DC: Child Welfare League of
America.
Raffi. 1989. Five Little Ducks. Illus. by Jose Aruego and Ariane Dewey. New York:
Crown.
Robinson, Martha. 1995. The Zoo at Night. New York: Margaret K. McElderry Books.
Rosen, Michael. 1990. Little Rabbit Foo Foo. New York: Simon & Schuster Books for
Young Readers.
177
References
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Rylant, Cynthia. 1983. Miss Maggie. New York: Dutton.
———. 1985. The Relatives Came. New York: Bradbury Press.
———. 1988. All I See. New York: Orchard Books.
———. 1991. Night in the Country. New York: Macmillan.
———. 1992. An Angel for Solomon Singer. New York: Orchard Books.
Saunders, Dave, and Julie Saunders. 1990. Dibble and Dabble. New York: Bradbury
Press.
Say, Allen. 1993. Grandfather’s Journey. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
———. 1999. Tea with Milk. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
Sendak, Maurice. 1962. Chicken Soup with Rice: A Book of Months. Nutshell Library.
New York: HarperCollins.
———. 1963. Where the Wild Things Are. New York: Harper & Row.
Seuss, Dr. 1963. Dr. Seuss’s ABC’s. New York: Beginner Books.
Shaw, Charles Green. 1947. It Looked Like Spilt Milk. New York: Harper.
Squire, Ann. 2002. Gemstones. New York: Childrens Press.
Steptoe, John. 1972. The Story of Jumping Mouse: A Native American Legend. New
York: Lothrop, Lee & Shepard.
Stewart, Sarah. 1995. The Library. New York: HarperCollins.
Stock, Catherine. 1993. Where Are You Going, Manyoni? New York: Morrow Junior
Books.
Stoltz, Mary. 1993. Say Something. New York: HarperCollins.
Taylor, Barbara. 1999. Nature Watch Spiders. New York: Lorenz Books.
Thomas, Shelley Moore. 1995. Putting the World to Sleep. Boston: Houghton
Mifflin.
Van Allsburg, Chris. 1986. The Stranger. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
Waber, Bernard. 1972. Ira Sleeps Over. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
Wang, Mary Lewis. 1989. The Ant and the Dove: An Aesop Tale Retold. Chicago:
Childrens Press.
Ward, Cindy. 1988. Cookies Week. New York: Putnam.
Wells, Rosemary. 1981. Timothy Goes to School. New York: Dial Books for Young
Readers.
———. 1985. Hazel’s Amazing Mother. New York: Dial Books for Young Readers.
———. 1994. Night Sounds, Morning Colors. New York: Dial Books for Young
Readers.
Westcott, Nadine Bernard. 1998. The Lady with the Alligator Purse. Boston: Little,
Brown.
White, E. B. 1970. The Trumpet of the Swan. New York: Harper & Row.
———. 1999. Stuart Little. New York: HarperTrophy.
Wildsmith, Brian. 1973. The Lazy Bear. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Wood, Audrey. 1984. The Napping House. San Diego: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
———. 1992. Twenty-Four Robbers. England: Childs Play International.
———. 2001. Heckedy Peg. Saint Paul: Minnesota Humanities Commission.
Wyeth, Sharon Dennis. 1998. Something Beautiful. New York: Doubleday Books for
Young Readers.
Yolen, Jane. 1991. Greyling. New York: Philomel Books.
———. 1981. Sleeping Ugly. New York: Coward, McCann & Geoghegan.
Reading with Meaning
178
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
———. 1996. Mother Earth, Father Sky. Honesdale, PA: Wordsong/Boyds Mills
Press.
———. 2000. Color Me a Rhyme. Honesdale, PA: Wordsong/Boyds Mills Press.
Zolotow, Charlotte. 1972. William’s Doll. New York: Harper & Row.
———. 1980. If You Listen. New York: Harper & Row.
———. 1984. I Know a Lady. New York: Puffin Books.
Professional Literature
Anderson, R. C., and P. D. Pearson. 1984. “A Schema-Theoretic View of Basic
Processes in Reading.” In Handbook of Reading Research, ed. P. D. Pearson.
White Plains, NY: Longman.
Block, Cathy, and Michael Pressley, eds. 2002. Comprehension Instruction: Research-
Based Practices. New York: Guilford Press.
Brown, A. L., J. D. Day, and E. S. Jones. 1983. “The Development of Plans for
Summarizing Texts.” Child Development 54: 968–979.
Calkins, Lucy. 1983. Lessons from a Child. Portsmouth, NH: Heinemann.
Duffy, G., L. Roehler, and G. Herrmann. 1988. “Modeling Mental Processes Helps
Poor Readers Become Strategic Readers.” Reading Teacher 41: 762–767.
Fielding, Linda, and P. David Pearson. 1994. “Reading Comprehension: What
Works?” Educational Leadership 51, 5: 62–67.
Hansen, Jane. 1981. “The Effects of Inference Training and Practice on Young
Childrens Reading Comprehension.” Reading Research Quarterly 16: 391–417.
Harvey, Stephanie, and Anne Goudvis. 2000. Strategies That Work: Teaching
Comprehension to Enhance Understanding. Portland, ME: Stenhouse.
Heard, Georgia. 1989. For the Good of the Earth and Sun. Portsmouth, NH:
Heinemann.
Keene, Ellin, and Susan Zimmermann. 1997. Mosaic of Thought: Teaching
Comprehension in a Reader’s Workshop. Portsmouth, NH: Heinemann.
Moline, Steve. 1995. I See What You Mean: Children at Work with Visual Information.
Portland, ME: Stenhouse.
Palinscar, A. M., and A. L. Brown. 1984. “Reciprocal Teaching of Comprehension
Fostering and Monitoring Activities.” Italics Cognition and Instruction 1:
117–175.
Pearson, P. David, and M. C. Gallagher. 1983. “The Instruction of Reading
Comprehension.” Contemporary Educational Psychology 8: 317–344.
Pearson, P. David, J. A. Dole, G. G. Duffy, and L. R. Roehler. 1992. “Developing
Expertise in Reading Comprehension: What Should Be Taught and How
Should It Be Taught?” In What Research Has to Say to the Teacher of Reading 2d
ed., ed. J. Farstup and S. J. Samuels. Newark, DE: International Reading
Association.
Perkins, David. 1993. “Creating a Culture of Thinking.” Educational Leadership 51,
3: 98–99.
179
References
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Pressley, G. M. 1976. “Mental Imagery Helps Eight-Year-Olds Remember What
They Read.” Journal of Educational Psychology 68: 355–359.
Raphael, T. E. 1984. “Teaching Learners About Sources of Information for
Answering Questions.” Journal of Reading 27: 303–311.
Reading with Meaning
180
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
181
Index
Abercrombie, Barbara, 171
Adams, Marilyn, 2
Adoff, Arnold, 34
Aliki, 65, 72
Allington, Richard, 2
All I See (Rylant), 130, 140
Alphabet Tree, The (Lionni), 161, 171
Altman, Linda Jacobs, 133–34, 140
Amazing Grace (Hoffman), 21, 63–65, 98
Amelia Bedelia Goes Camping (Parish), 70,
132
Amelia’s Road (Altman), 133–34, 140
anchor charts
creating, 57
for text-to-self connections, 60–61
anchor lessons, 19
inferences, 107–16
for mental images, 80–86
questioning, 125–36
synthesis, 160–68
Anderson. R. C., 107
Angel for Solomon Singer, An (Rylant), 98,
132–33, 140
Angelou, Maya, 74
Ant and the Dove, The (Wang), 46
Arnold, Tedd, 70
artifacts, evaluation through, 48
artistic responses, mental images and,
80–85
Ask Jeeves, 151
Atwater, Florence, 28
Atwater, Richard, 28
Atwell, Nancie, xii, 2
authors, schema for, 67
Avi, 28
Barchas, Sarah, 89
Bartels, Joanie, 17, 26
baseline assessment, 48
Baylor, Byrd, 98, 167, 171
Bear Went over the Mountain (Downs), 46
behavior, 18–20
belief statements, vii–ix
making explicit, 6
Berger, Barbara, 98, 121, 140
“Biographies” book tub, 1
book baskets
songbooks, 1
teacher selections for, 26–27
book clubs, 96–98
book selection for, 97–98
grouping children from, 98
book selection
active engagement and, 40–41
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
book selection (cont.)
for book clubs, 97–98
book talks and, 45
conferences and, 46
considerations in, 40–44
content and, 41
difficulty level and, 40, 43–44
libraries and, 47
for making inferences, 121
for making personal connections, 55
for making predictions, 109–10
for mental images, 80, 92
mini-lessons on, 40
motivation and, 41, 42–43
nonfiction, 155–56
praising student choices, 46–47
providing choices for, 45
quality vs. quantity, 47
for questioning, 140
for read-alouds, 45
recommendations for, 45
recommending charts, 45
schema and, 41–42, 53
for schema (prior knowledge), 72
sticky notes and, 45
by students, 27, 39–47
student-teacher browsing, 45
for synthesis, 171
by teachers, 26–27
for think-alouds, 55
variety and, 41, 43–44
books
active engagement in, 40–41
challenging,” 44
childrens knowledge of, 15
collections of, 1
easy,” 44
engaging, 25
exploring variety of, 26
“just right,” 44
professional, 2
bookshelves, 1
book talks, book selection for, 45
Bradley, James, 116
Brinkloe, Julie, 59, 72, 116, 121
Brown, Mark Tolon, 34, 39
Bugs! Bugs! Bugs! (Dussling), 145
Bunting, Eve, 54, 66, 67, 98, 114, 121,
128, 140, 160, 171
Calkins, Lucy, xii, 2, 7
Calliope: World History for Young People,
155
calmness, of teachers, 19
Cambourne, Brian, 2, 6
captions, in nonfiction, 149
Carlstrom, Nancy White, 92
Catwings (LeGuin), 136
CDs, 156
challenging” reading, 44
“Changes of the World, The” (student
poem, Zachary), 75
chapter books, 47
Charlie Anderson (Abercrombie), 171
charts
anchor, 57, 60–61
recording text-to-self connections on,
60–61
recording thinking processes in, 56–57
of student thinking, 5
Chicken Soup with Rice (Sendak), 1, 34
Chika Chika Boom Boom (Martin and
Archambault), 1
choice. See also book selection
importance of, 40, 103–4
Chrysanthemum (Henkes), 59
classroom
bookshelves, 1
distractions in, mini-lessons on, 32–33
meeting area, 1
prepared for first day of school, 1–2
supplies, 3
writing table, 2
Clay, Marie, 48
close-ups, in nonfiction, 149
Close Your Eyes (Marzollo), 92
cloze activities, 51
Cobblestone: The History Magazine for
Young People, 155
Coffeehouse Poetry Day, 73, 74–77, 94
Coffelt, Nancy, 88
collaboration, 95
Reading with Meaning
182
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Color Me a Rhyme (Yolen), 92
Color of His Own, A (Lionni), 161
community building, 16–23
creating a culture and climate for think-
ing, 17
mutual trust, 20–23
in September, 27
through singing, 17
comparisons, in nonfiction, 149, 153
comprehension
decoding vs., 48, 52
evaluation of, 48–49
comprehension instruction
explicit, xii
gradual release of responsibility model,
6
principles guiding, 6–7
proficient reader research, 8–10
Comprehension Instruction: Research-Based
Practices (Pearson and Duke), 50
comprehension strategies
metacognitive thinking about, 9
of proficient readers, 8
conclusions, schema and, 111
Condra, Estelle, 167, 171
conferences
book selection and, 46
explicit instruction in, 33–36
teacher feedback through, 11
time allowed for, 7
connections
evaluation of, 62–63
explicit instruction on, 58–63
gradual release of responsibility model
and, 61–63
mini-lessons on, 60–61
as source of answers to questions, 130
text-to-self, 55–63, 119
text-to-text, 63–65
text-to-world, 66–67
through group discussion, 95
Venn diagrams for, 65
Conniff, Richard, 147
content, book selection and, 41
Convention Notebooks, 148–50
conventions, nonfiction, 148–50
conversation. See discussion
Cookie’s Week (Ward), 21
Cooney, Barbara, 88
creative environments, 7
Creatures of Earth, Sea, and Sky (Heard),
80, 92, 112–13, 121
critical judgments, 8
curriculum mandates, working with, 6
cutaways, in nonfiction, 149
dance response, 102
Daniels, Harvey, 2
“Deadlysilk” (Conniff), 147
decoding, comprehension vs., 48, 52
dePaola, Tomie, 21, 63, 65, 72, 98, 101,
116, 121, 137, 158, 171
Dibble and Dabble (Saunders and
Saunders), 117
difficulty level
book selection and, 40
variety in, 43–44
discussion, 94–104
book clubs, 96–98
connections through, 95
inferences and, 95
practicing conversation, 37–38
questioning strategies, 95
of questions about text, 132–33
thoughtful, 94–96
Dodd, Anne Wescott, 92
Dogs in Space (Coffelt), 88
Dole, J. A., 8
“Dolphins” (student poem, Abby), 74
Donnelly, Judy, 5, 93, 98
Dorling Kindersley Readers, 155
Downs, Robert Bingham, 46
Dr. Seuss’s ABC’s (Seuss), 1, 34, 50
dramatic responses, 102
interpretation through, 111–13
mental images, 81–82
“Dressing Like a Snake” (Heard), 112–13
“Ducks on a Winter Night” (Heard),
82–83
Duffy, G. G., 8
DuMoulin, Michelle, 148–49
Dussling, Jennifer, 145
183
Index
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
easy” reading, 44
engagement
book selection and, 40–41
variety and, 43
enthusiasm, 34
evaluation
record keeping for, 48–49
of student text-to-self connections,
62–63
by teachers, 48–49
Evans, Dale, 17
explicit belief statements, 6
explicit instruction
about words, 50–53
comprehension, xii
in conferences, 33–36
on connections, 58–63
reading, 6, 10
on text-to-self connections, 58–63
on think-alouds, 54–55
expository text. See also nonfiction
predictable features of, 145–47
eye-to-eye and knee-to-knee, 56, 146
Eyewitness Books, 155
fables, 166–67
Fables (Lobel), 167, 171
“Fairy Tales” book tub, 1
fiction. See also books; book selection
determining importance in, 142
exploring variety of, 26
identifying, 146
nonfiction vs., 144–46, 144–47
organization of, 144–45
field guides, 156
Fireflies (Brinkloe), 59, 72, 116, 121
First Connections: The Golden Book
Encyclopedia, 151, 156
First Discovery Books, 155
Fisher, Aileen, 74
Five Little Ducks (Raffi), 1, 28, 34, 38
Flags of Our Fathers (Bradley), 43, 44,
116
Fletcher, Ralph, 2
Flossie and the Fox (McKissack), 87
Fly Away Home (Bunting), 121, 140
focus
allowing time for, 63
in think-alouds, 55
Footprints and Shadows (Dodd), 92
For the Good of the Earth and Sun (Heard),
121
Fox, Mem, 59, 72
Francen, Mike, 67
“Frog and Toad” books, 42
Galdone, Paul, 138
Gallagher, M. C., 10
Gannet, Ruth Stiles, 28, 73
Garland, Sherry, 98, 127, 140
Gemstones (Squire), 34–36, 37–38
Gibbons, Gail, 131, 140
glossaries, 149
Goodnight to Annie (Merriam), 92
Goudvis, Anne, 2
gradual release of responsibility model, 6,
10–13
locating information in nonfiction
books, 150–51
for nonfiction predictions, 146
planning for, 12–13
strategy instruction using, 13
synthesis, 163–64
text-to-self connections, 61–63
Grandfather’s Journey (Say), 144–45
Grandfather Twilight (Berger), 98, 121,
125–26, 140
Graves, Donald, xii, 2
Greenfield, Eloise, 74
Greyling, The (Yolan), 83–84, 92
Grindley, Sally, 140
group work. See small-group work
guided practice, 10–11
Hagerty, Pat, xii
Hand Rhymes (Brown), 34, 39
Hansel and Gretel, 70
“Happy Trails to You,” 17
Harris, Beth Coombe, 46
Harry Potter series, 86, 91
Harvey, Stephanie, xii, 2, 21–22, 147–48
Harwayne, Shelley, xi, xii, 2
Reading with Meaning
184
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Hazels Amazing Mother (Wells), 60, 61, 72
Heard, Georgia, 2, 74, 80, 82, 92, 112,
121
Heckedy Peg (Wood), 102
“Henry” (student poem, Olivia), 75
Hindley, Joanne, 2
Hoffman, Mary, 21, 63, 98
Honey, I Love (Greenfield), 21
“Hot Tubs” (student poem, Griffin), 76
Hours, The, 44
Houston, Gloria, 59, 72
Howard, Jane R., 92
How Many Days to America? (Bunting),
67, 98, 114–15, 121, 128
Hush Little Baby (Long), 45
Hutchins, Chryse, 44, 106
I Am the Ocean (Marshak), 92
I Can Read About . . ., 155
I Have a Dream (Francen), 67
I Know a Lady (Zolotow), 69, 72
I Read It, but I Dont Get It (Tovani), 43–44
I See What You Mean (Moline), 146–47
I Was Walking Down the Road (Barchas),
89
Ice Stars (Kramer), 90
“Icicles” (student poem, Caroline), 75
ideas, determining importance of, 8
If You Listen (Zolotow), 116, 121
importance, determining, 8, 142, 143
independence
in asking questions, 136–39
in determining importance in nonfic-
tion, 152–54
in guided release of responsibility
model, 10, 11
guiding children toward, 10, 23
in making inferences, 117–20
in reading nonfiction, 151
in synthesizing information, 168–71
in use of mental images, 86–91
in use of schema, 69–71
work activity time and, 103–4
indexes, 149
inferences, 105–21
anchor lessons, 107–16
book selection for, 121
drawing from text, 8
evidence of understanding and inde-
pendence, 117–20
importance of, 107
improving discussion with, 95
key points, 121
learning word meanings through, 107–9
predictions vs., 107
questions for, 114–15
riddles and, 113–14
as source of answers to questions,
127–30
in synthesis, 164–68
synthesis and, 168, 169
text selection for, 121
two-column notes for, 105–6, 113
Ingpen, Robert, 67
inner voice, when learning, 147–48
“Insects” book tub, 1
inspiration, from questions of other,
131–33
interests, of students, 41
interpretations, 8
in answering questions about text,
130–31
gaining perspective through, 116
mental images and, 81–82
schema and, 111, 115–16
through dramatic expression, 111–13
interruptions, mini-lessons on, 32–33
Ira Sleeps Over (Waber), 62, 72
It Looked Like Spilt Milk (Shaw), 34
Just Me and My Dad (Meyer), 70
“just right” reading, 44
Keats, Ezra Jack, 59, 72
Keene, Ellin, xii, 2, 8, 9, 158–59
Kids Discover, 155
Kilborne, Sarah, 120
Kissing Hand, The (Penn), 2
Koala Lou (Fox), 59, 72
Kramer, S. A., 90
Kraus, Robert, 21
labels, in nonfiction, 149
185
Index
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Lady with the Alligator Purse, The
(Westcott), 1, 34, 46
Langstaff, John, 28
language, precise, in think-alouds, 55
Language Arts magazine, 43, 44, 158
Lazy Bear, The (Wildsmith), 169
learning
from children, 124–25
gradual release of responsibility model
and, 10
inner voice response to, 147–48
nonfiction books and, 142
social nature of, 132
“Learn to Read” books, 42
“Leaves” (student poem, Madison and
Camille), 76–77
Lego activities, 102
LeGuin, Ursula, 136
Levy, David, 90, 91
libraries
childrens collections, 47
learning how to use, 151
Library, The, 162
Lifetimes (Mellonie and Ingpen), 67
Lindgren, Astrid, 28
Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe, The
(Lewis), 87–89
Lionni, Leo, 161, 171
listening
active, 94–95
to read-alouds, 26
showing children how to think about,
19–20
to students, 18
literacy achievement,
evaluation of, 48–49
literacy instruction, quality of, ix
literate environments, 23
“Little Bear” books, 1, 44
Little Bear (Minarik), 87
Little Bear’s Friend (Minarik), 44
Littledale, Freya, 98, 139
Little Green Frog (Harris), 46
Little Rabbit Foo Foo (Rosen), 1, 28, 34
Little Yellow Duck, The, 46
Lobel, Arnold, 167, 171
London, Jonathan, 127
Long, Sylvia, 45
Lotus Seed, The (Garland), 98, 127–30,
140
magazines, 155
Magic Fish, The (Littledale), 98, 139
magnetic letters, 2, 3
mandated curriculum, working with, 6
manners
behavior, 18–20
share time and, 15
maps, in nonfiction, 149
Marshak, Suzanna, 92
Marzollo, Jean, 92
Mazer, Anne, 79, 92
McKissack, Patricia, 87
McLerran, Alice, 70, 72
meeting area, 1
Mellonie, Bryan, 67
mental images, 74–92
adapting during reading, 83–84
anchor lessons, 80–86
artistic responses, 80–85
book selection for, 92
dramatic responses, 81–82
evidence of understanding and
independence, 86–91
interpretations and, 81–82
key points, 91–92
readers schema and, 80–81
as source of answers to questions,
129–30
student understanding of, 86–91
text selection for, 80
thinking aloud about, 77–80
through poetry, 74–77
value of, 77
writing about, 84–86
Merriam, Eve, 79, 92, 140
metacognitive thinking, 9
Meyer, Mercer, 70
Miller, Debbie, vii–ix
Mills, Lauren, 167, 171
Milton, Joyce, 21, 98
Minarik, Else Holmelund, 44, 87
Reading with Meaning
186
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
mini-lessons, 29–33
on book selection, 40
on classroom distractions, 32–33
on readers’ workshop procedures, 32
on sticky notes, 33
on text-to-self connections, 60–61
time allowed for, 7
Miss Maggie (Rylant), 67, 116, 121
modeling, by parents
book clubs, 96–98
modeling, by students
motivation and, 33
modeling, by teachers
planning, 54–55
readers’ workshop behaviors, 26
reading behaviors, 10, 11, 31–33
reflective thinking, 37
response, 100
value of, 31
Moline, Steve, 146–47
Monarch Butterfly (Gibbons), 131, 140
monitoring, teacher role in, 22–23
moral issues, text-to world connections,
66–67
Mother Earth, Father Sky (Yolen), 121
motivation
book selection and, 41, 42–43
importance of, 21
read-alouds and, 42
student interest and, 41
student modeling and, 33
Mountain Streams (CD), 84–86, 92
Mouse Soup (Lobel), 44
Mouse Tales (Lobel), 44
Mr. Popper’s Penguins (Atwater and
Atwater), 28
mutual trust, 20–23
My Father the Dragon series (Gannet),
28, 73
My First Real Mother Goose, 1
My Great-Aunt Arizona (Houston), 59, 72
Napping House, The (Wood), 80, 92
National Audubon Society First Field
Guides, 156
National Geographic, 147
National Geographic for Kids, 155
Nature Watch Spider (Taylor), 145
needs-based support groups, 49
newspapers, 155
Night in the Country (Rylant), 79, 92
Night Sounds, Morning Colors (Wells), 77,
82, 92
No Jumping on the Bed (Arnold), 70
nonfiction, 149–56
book selection for, 155–56
characteristics of, 145–47, 151
conventions of, 148–50
determining importance in, 142, 143
evidence of understanding and inde-
pendence, 152–54
exploring variety of, 26, 142–43
fiction vs., 144–47, 151
identifying, 146
interest in, 142–43
key points, 155
locating specific information, 150–51
prediction strategies, 145–47
questioning about, 143–44
reading order, 147
synthesis, 163
using features of, 142
notebooks
for book clubs, 97
Convention Notebooks, 148–50
recording text-to-self connections in,
60
recording thinking processes in, 56–57
for response, 99
for tracking student evaluations, 48–49
noticing, relationship-building through,
18, 27
“Now I get it!” stage, 11
Now One Foot, Now the Other (dePaola),
65, 72
Nye, Naomi Shihab, 44
observations
by students, 30–31
by teachers, 22
Oh, a Hunting We Will Go (Langstaff), 1,
28
187
Index
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
“Oh, What a Beautiful Morning,” 158
group singing of, 17
as a signal for readers’ workshop to
begin, 26
Oliver Button Is a Sissy (dePaola), 21,
63–65, 72, 94, 98, 101, 116, 121,
164, 168–70, 171
“One Earth,” 36
open-ended responses, 99
Oppenheim, Shulamith Levey, 140
organization
of fiction, 144–45
of nonfiction, 144–45
“Our Promise to Each Other,” 17, 67
outside sources, as source of answers to
questions, 128–29
Paper Bag Princess, The (Munsch), 21
parents
book club modeling with, 97
letters about their children, 16
notes from, 3
respect for teachers by, 6
sharing books with, 28
songbooks and, 28
Parish, Peggy, 70, 132
Park, Frances, 110, 121
Park, Ginger, 110, 121
Peach and Blue (Kilborne), 120
Pearson, P. David, 8, 10, 14, 50, 107
PEBC. See Public Education and Business
Coalition (PEBC)
pencil sharpeners mini-lesson, 32
Penn, Audrey, 2
personal experience, predictions based on,
93
perspectives, gaining through interpreta-
tion, 116
Peterson, Ralph, 2
Peterson Field Guide for Young Naturalists,
156
phonics, 49–52
photographs, in nonfiction, 149
picture books, 1
Pinnell, Gay Su, 2
Pippi Longstocking (Lindgren), 28
planning
adapting, 14, 21–22
for gradual release of responsibility
model, 12–13
think-alouds, 54–55
poetry
Coffeehouse Poetry Day, 74–77
creating mental images from, 74–77,
80–83
dramatic interpretation of, 81–82,
112–13
exploring variety of, 26
by students, 74–77
“Poetry” book tub, 1
Poppy (Avi), 28
Poppy and Rye (Avi), 28
“Poppy” (student poem, Cory), 76
Post-its. See sticky notes
Power, Brenda, 2
“Predictable Books” book tub, 1
predictable environments, 7
predictions
based on personal experience, 93
book selection for, 109–10
confirming, 111
for fiction, 144–45
inferences vs., 107
making about text, 109–11
for nonfiction, 145–47
rereading text for, 111
student reasons for, 111
two-column notes for, 111
print types, in nonfiction, 149
prior knowledge. See also schema (prior
knowledge)
activation of, 8
motivation and, 41
professional books, 2, 22
professional development, 22
proficient reader research, 8–10
Public Education and Business Coalition
(PEBC), xi
Putting the World to Sleep (Thomas), 92
questioning, 124–40
about nonfiction, 143–44
Reading with Meaning
188
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
anchor lessons, 125–36
before, during, and after read-alouds,
125–26, 128
book selection for, 140
determining source of answers, 127–30
discussion of, 132–33
evidence of understanding and inde-
pendence, 136–40
improving discussion with, 95
for inferences, 114–15
inspiration from, 131–34
interpretation and, 130–31
key points, 140
learning from children, 124–25
locating specific information in nonfic-
tion, 150
in personal lives, 134–35
purposeful, 125–26
by readers, 8
reasons for, 126–27
strategies, 102
uses of, 134–35
wondering, 124–25
questioning webs, 123, 136
readers interpretation and, 131, 132
Quiet Please (Merriam), 79, 92
Rag Coat, The (Mills), 167, 171
Ranger Rick, 155
readability, book selection and, 40
read-alouds, 27–29
book selection and, 45
motivation and, 42
opportunities for, 28–29
questions asked before, during, and
after, 125–26, 128
songbooks for, 27–28
synthesis during and after, 166
value of, 29
Reader Observation Survey, 48
readers
inferences by, 114–15
interpretations by, 115–16
questioning by, 125–35
student observations of, 29–31, 38
thinking about self as, 7–8
thinking processes of, 57
readers’ workshop, 26–38
activities in, 34–36
components of, 10–11
daily, 7
early reader activities, 34
mini-lessons, 29–33
opportunities for thinking about self as
a reader in, 7
procedures mini-lessons, 32
reading aloud in, 27–29
reading and conferring, 33–36
September activities, 26
setting the tone for, 26
sharing, 36–38
teacher book selection of, 26–27
teacher observation of, 22
time allowed for, 7–8
reading
bedside, 43–44
daily opportunities for, 7
encouraging enjoyment of, 26
enthusiasm for, 43
places for, 30–31
real context for, 51
student interest in, 29–30
teacher enthusiasm for, 42
time allowed for, 7, 43
reading behaviors
mini-lessons on, 29–33
modeling, 29–33, 31–33
reading comprehension. See comprehen-
sion
reading instruction
explicit, 6, 10
quality of, ix
successful teacher strategies for, 12
reading speed, 9, 43
reading strategies
application of, 10, 11
explanation of, 10
modeling, by teachers, 10, 11
working definitions for, 12
“Ready Set Read” books, 42
real-world issues, text connections to,
66–67
189
Index
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
recommendations
for book selection, 45
synthesis in, 164
record keeping, for evaluation, 48–49
reflective thinking
encouraging, 37
modeling, 37
Regis University, 6
relationship building
community building activities, 16–17
respect and, 18
teacher role in, 18–20
through noticing, by teacher, 18, 27
Relatives Came, The (Rylant), 57–58, 72
respect
by parents, for teachers, 6
in share time, 37
showing children how to behave, 18–20
response
modeling, 100
notebooks for, 99
open-ended, 99
options for, 98–101
respectful, 18
sticky notes for, 99
story maps for, 100–101
student activities, 102–3
thoughtful, 94–95
time allowed for, 7
two-column notes for, 100
Venn diagrams for, 100
webs for, 100
responsibility
gradual release of (See gradual release of
responsibility model)
for teaching, 22
retelling, as synthesis, 163–64
rhymes, 26
riddles, 113–14
ripple, synthesis as, 159, 160–63
Robinson, Martha, 82, 92
Roehler, L. R., 8
Rosen, Michael, 34
Rosenshontz, 36
Routman, Regie, xii
Roxaboxen (McLerran), 70, 72
Royal Bee, The (Park and Park), 109–10,
121
rudeness, handling, 18–20
Ryder, Joanne, 80
Rylant, Cynthia, 57–58, 67, 72, 79, 92,
98, 116, 121, 130, 132–33, 140
Salamander Room, The (Mazer), 79, 92
Saunders, Dave, 118
Saunders, Julie, 118
Say, Allen, 144, 159, 171
Say Something (Stoltz), 79–80
scaffolding, 10
schema (prior knowledge), 53–72
activating, 8, 67–68
for authors, 67
book selection and, 41–42, 53
building, 42, 67–68
determining word meanings through,
107–9
differences among readers, 81
drawing conclusions from, 111
evidence of understanding and inde-
pendence, 69–71
first lesson in, 57–58
interpretations based on, 111, 115–16
key points, 71–72
learning to use, 57–58
mental images created from, 80–81
revising, 67–68
as source of answers to questions,
127–30
for text elements, 67
texts for, 72
text-to-self connections, 58–63
text-to-text connections, 63–65
text-to-world connections, 66–67
for types of text, 67
See the Ocean (Condra), 167, 171
Sendak, Maurice, 34
sensory images, 8
series books nonfiction, 155
share time, 36–38
establishing procedures for, 36–37
manners and, 15
signaling beginning of, 36
Reading with Meaning
190
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
student responsibilities in, 37–38
synthesis in, 164
time allowed for, 7
sharing, with parents, 28
Shaw, Charles Green, 34
Shouse, Jennifer, 151
sight word vocabulary, 51
singing
community building through, 17
in readers’ workshop, 34
as response to reading, 103
role of, 26
as transition to share time, 36
value of, 28, 50
Sleeping Ugly (Yolen), 98
small-group evaluation, 49
small-group work
book clubs, 97–98
informal assessment of, 62–63
locating specific information in nonfic-
tion, 150–51
making text-to-self connections in,
61–63
releasing responsibility to, 61–63
Smoky Night (Bunting), 66, 160–61, 171
Snow White and Rose Red (Cooney), 88
Snowy Day, The (Keats), 59, 72
social issues, text-to world connections,
66–67
social learning, 132
Something Beautiful (Wyeth), 116, 121
songbooks, 1
reading aloud, 27–28
value of, 28
“Song Books” book tub, 1
sounds, mental images from, 84–86
sound-symbol relationships, 51
“Space” (student poem, Emily), 76
spelling instruction, 50
Squire, Ann, 34
standardized tests, 16
Stars and Planets (Levy), 90, 91
“Start off Stories,” 46
Steptoe, John, 164, 171
sticky notes
for book clubs, 97
book selection and, 45
for inferring word meanings, 109, 110
marking information in books with,
37–38
mini-lessons on, 33
for response, 99
teaching use of, 37–38
Stock, Catherine, 103, 107, 121
Stoltz, Mary, 80, 92
story maps
form for, 100–101
for response, 100–101
Story of Jumping Mouse, The (Steptoe),
160, 164–68, 171
Stranger, The (Van Allsburg), 124–25, 140
strategic thinking, by children, viii–ix
Strega Nona (dePaola), 137
Stuart Little (White), 86
student interviews, 3
study groups, for teachers, 22
“Sunday Morning on CBS” (student
poem, Devon), 76
supplies, 3
support, determining need for, 49
synthesis, 8, 158–71
anchor lessons, 160–68
in book recommendations, 164
book selection for, 171
childrens definitions of, 162–63, 168–70
evidence of understanding and inde-
pendence, 168–70
individual approaches to, 151
inferential, 164–67
key points, 171
locating specific information in nonfic-
tion books, 150–51
reader monitoring and, 160–63
retelling and, 163–64
revising while reading, 168
as ripple of meaning, 159, 160–63
tables of contents, 149
Table Where Rich People Sit, The (Baylor),
98, 167, 171
Taileypo, The (Galdone), 138
Taylor, Barbara, 145
191
Index
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
teachable moments, for teaching children
about respect, 18–20
teachers
assuming responsibility for teaching,
22
book selection by, 26–27
characteristics of, vii–viii
feedback from, through conferences, 11
making beliefs explicit, 6
modeling enthusiasm for reading, 42
modeling reading strategies, 10
professional development, 22
proper role of, 22–23
respect for, by parents, 6
Tea with Milk (Say), 159, 171
test scores, 16
text elements
schema for, 67
text-to-self connections, 55–56, 119
anchor charts for, 60–61
defined, 57
explicit instruction on, 58–63
informal assessment of, 62–63
meaningful, 59, 61
releasing responsibility for making,
61–63
understanding childrens thinking
about, 60–61
text-to-text connections, 63–65
defined, 64
demonstrating, 63–64
Venn diagrams for, 65
text-to-world connections, 66–67
text types, schema for, 67
themes, determining importance of, 8
think-alouds
about mental images, 77–80
authenticity of, 54, 55
book selection for, 55
demonstrating, 54–57
expectations for, 55
eye-to-eye and knee-to-knee, 56
maintaining focus in, 55
planning, 54–55
precise language in, 55
by teachers, 11
thinking
about self as a reader, 7–8
analysis of, viii
charts, 5
creating a culture and climate for, 17
metacognitive, 9
recording, 56–57
response options, 98–101
“Thinking about Questioning” chart, 126
thinking through the text together, 56
This Same Sky, A Collection of Poems from
Around the World (Nye), 44
Three Billy Goats Gruff, The (Finch), 45
Three Little Pigs, The (Bentley), 34, 36
Time for Kids/Big Picture Edition, 155
Timothy Goes to School (Wells), 117
Titanic Lost and Found, The (Donnelly),
93, 98
tone-setting, 27
Touch the Poem (Adoff ), 34
Tough Boris, 44
Tovani, Cris, 43–44
“Trains” (student poem, Zach), 75
Trumpet of the Swan, The (White), 28,
140
trust
mutual, 20–23
of oneself, 22
Tut’s Mummy Lost and Found (Donnelly),
5, 98, 134
Twenty-Four Robbers (Wood), 1, 34
two-column notes
for inferences, 105–6, 113
for making predictions, 111
for response, 100
“Two Little Monkeys,” 34
Two of Them, The (Aliki), 65, 72
Van Allsburg, Chris, 124, 140
variety
book selection and, 41, 43–44
Venn diagrams
for distinguishing nonfiction from
fiction books, 146
for response, 100
for text-to-text connections, 65
Reading with Meaning
192
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
visual images
creating from text, 8
Waber, Bernard, 62, 72
Wall, The (Bunting), 54
Ward, Cindy, 21
Way Down South, 36
Weaver, Connie, xii, 2
webs
questioning, 123, 131, 132, 136
responding through, 100
Weekly Reader, 155
Wells, Rosemary, 60, 72, 77, 92
Westcott, Nadine Bernard, 46
What Does the Rain Play? (Carlstrom), 92
When I Am Sleepy (Howard), 92
Where Are You Going, Manyoni? (Stock),
103, 107–9, 121
Where the Wild Things Are (Sendak), 97
White, E. B., 28, 86, 140
Whose Mouse Are You? (Kraus), 20–21
Why Is the Sky Blue? (Grindley), 140
Wild, Wild Sunflower Child (Carlstrom),
92
Wild, Wild Wolves (Milton), 21, 98
Wildsmith, Brian, 169
Williams Doll (Zolotow), 98
Winter Fox (Stock), 121
Wise Woman and Her Secret, The
(Merriam), 135, 140
Wonder Boxes, 134–35, 143–44, 151
Wonder Cards, 134–35
for locating specific information, 150
wondering
in personal lives, 135
understanding through, 124–25
Wood, Audrey, 34, 80, 92
word identification, 49–52
dramatic responses and, 82
word meanings
determining, using schema, 108–9
dramatic interpretation of, 111–13
inferring, 107–9
inferring with sticky notes, 109, 110
words
explicit instruction about, 50–53
mental images created from, 80–81
signaling learning, 147–48
sound-symbol relationships, 51
text-to-self connections about, 61
work activity time, 103–4
working definitions, of reading strategies,
12
worksheets, 98
World Book Online, 151
Worth, Valerie, 74
writers’ workshop, 22
writing, about mental images, 84–86
writing table, 2
Wyeth, Sharon Dennis, 116, 121
Yanni Rubbish (Oppenheim), 140
Yolen, Jane, 74, 83, 92, 98, 121
Zimmermann, Susan, 2
Zolotow, Charlotte, 69, 72, 98, 116, 121
Zoo at Night, The (Robinson), 82, 92
Zoo Books, 155
193
Index
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.
Look into Debbie Miller’s first-grade classroom
Strategy Instruction in Action
Stephanie Harvey and Anne Goudvis
Reading comprehension is about much more than answering literal ques-
tions at the end of a passage, story, or chapter, as youll see in the videotape
series Strategy Instruction in Action. Created by Stephanie Harvey
and Anne Goudvis, authors of Strategies That Work, these four
videotapes take you into classrooms where Debbie Miller, Leslie
Blauman, and Mary Buerger teach reading comprehension in the
context of reading workshop, modeling their thinking and giving
students ample time to practice so they learn what proficient
readers do to make sense of the text. To enhance their students
understanding, Debbie, Mary, and Leslie demonstrate several
comprehension strategies, including asking questions, determin-
ing importance, and inferring. They use a variety of fiction and
nonfiction for strategy instruction, including picture books,
magazine articles, and young adult novels. On each tape, the
teachers lead a mini-lesson, confer and share with the kids, and
have a conversation with Stephanie and Anne about the comprehension
instruction in their classrooms.
You’ll find details about these four videotapes, as well as brief video
clips, at our web site: www.stenhouse.com
Reading with Meaning: Teaching Comprehension in the Primary Grades by Debbie Miller. Copyright © 2006.
Stenhouse Publishers. All rights reserved. No reproduction without written permission from publisher.